libreoffice-help-gl 1:4.2.3~rc3-0ubuntu1 / usr / share / libreoffice / help / gl / swriter.ht

13 .uno%3AClosePreview 39 To exit the page preview, click the Close Preview button.
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 44 Mostra unha vista previa da páxina impresa ou pecha a vista previa.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3APB_PATH 1d Opens the Select Path dialog.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ACB_SINGLE_JOBS 3f Prints each form letter individually with the selected printer.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FILE 20 Saves the form letters in files.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ALB_COLUMN 51 Uses the content of the selected data field as the file name for the form letter.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3AED_PATH 2d Specifies the path to store the form letters.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_TO 3f Indica o número do derradeiro rexistro que se desexa imprimir.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_PRINTER 18 Prints the form letters.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_FROM 3d Indica o número do primeiro rexistro que se desexa imprimir.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FROM 38 Indica que rexistros se desexa incluír na carta modelo.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_ALL 2c Procesa todos os rexistros da base de datos.
33 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_GENERATE_FROM_DATABASE 4b Xerar o nome de cada ficheiro a partir dos datos contidos na base de datos.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_INDIVIDUAL 3a Prema para crear un documento para cada rexistro de datos.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_MARKED 99 Procesa só os rexistros marcados da base de datos. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel cando antes se marcasen os rexistros necesarios na base de datos.
22 SW_LISTBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_LB_FILTER 21 Seleccione o formato de ficheiro.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_SINGLE_DOC 4e Prema para crear un documento grande que conteña todos os rexistros de datos.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TLB_TREELISTBOX 2c Seleccione unha base de datos e unha táboa.
1f .uno%3ASendOutlineToStarImpress 48 Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document.
1d .uno%3ASendOutlineToClipboard 4b Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF).
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fabstractdialog%2Fparas 74 Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fabstractdialog%2Foutlines 48 Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fabstractdialog%2FAbstractDialog bc Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents.
15 .uno%3ACreateAbstract bc Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents.
20 .uno%3ASendAbstractToStarImpress 96 Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
22 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
11 .uno%3ANewHtmlDoc bc Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
27 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL bc Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX15 d1 Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
18 SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_LISTBOX 102 Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the contents of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX14 d1 Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX6 f5 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX5 f3 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX16 52 Type the number of the page number that you want to jump to, and then press Enter.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX13 74 Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX9 f1 Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_HYP a3 Creates a hyperlink when you drag and drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX8 5a Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX4 b5 Sets the drag and drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX12 38 Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_COPY a6 Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag and drop in the current document. You cannot drag and drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX11 4d Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_LINK 161 Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag and drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_OUTLINES 68 Click 1 to only view the top level headings in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX7 22 Shows or hides the Navigator list.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX3 a5 Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Graphics".
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX2 a9 Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Graphics".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX10 4d Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX24 c0 Opens the Navigation toolbar, where you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX17 4a Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open.
10 .uno%3ANavigator e4 Shows or hides the Navigator, where you can quickly jump to different parts of your document. You can also use the Navigator to insert elements from the current document or other open documents, and to organize master documents.
1e SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA_ERROR 38 Select this icon to browse through wrong table formulas.
18 SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA 32 Select this icon to browse through table formulas.
e SW_HID_NID_SEL 2e Select this icon to browse through selections.
f SW_HID_NID_PREV 3c Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type.
f SW_HID_NID_NEXT 38 Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type.
11 SW_HID_NID_POSTIT 2c Select this icon to browse through comments.
13 SW_HID_NID_SRCH_REP 32 Select this icon to browse through search results.
e SW_HID_NID_PGE 29 Select this icon to browse through pages.
f SW_HID_NID_OUTL 2c Select this icon to browse through headings.
f SW_HID_NID_MARK 2d Select this icon to browse through reminders.
16 SW_HID_NID_INDEX_ENTRY 31 Select this icon to browse through index entries.
e SW_HID_NID_OLE 2f Select this icon to browse through OLE objects.
e SW_HID_NID_TBL 2a Select this icon to browse through tables.
e SW_HID_NID_FTN 2d Select this icon to browse through footnotes.
e SW_HID_NID_REG 2c Select this icon to browse through sections.
e SW_HID_NAVI_VS 115 Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click one of the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected.
e SW_HID_NID_DRW 33 Select this icon to browse through drawing objects.
e SW_HID_NID_BKM 2d Select this icon to browse through bookmarks.
f SW_HID_NID_CTRL 32 Select this icon to browse through control fields.
14 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEDOWN 3b Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object.
e SW_HID_NID_GRF 2c Select this icon to browse through graphics.
12 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEUP 3d Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object.
e SW_HID_NID_FRM 2f Select this icon to browse through text frames.
10 SW_HID_SCRL_NAVI b5 If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fshowpreview 39 Turns on or off a preview of the selected AutoText entry.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Frelnet 2c Links to files on the Internet are relative.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Frelfile 3c Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fgroup 43 Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Frename 5e Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fpathlb be Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Finsert 123 Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2FEditCategoriesDialog 2e Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fimport 89 Opens a dialog where you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fname bb Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditcategories%2Fnew 50 Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fmacro 57 Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fedit a0 Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Freplace 6e Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fcopy 2e Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2FAutoTextDialog da Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fcategories 2e Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fnewtext d5 Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fnew cf Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fautotext 89 Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fname bc Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Frename 5f Opens the Rename AutoText dialog, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fshortname 96 Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautotext%2Fpath 52 Opens the Edit Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText.
13 .uno%3AEditGlossary da Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Fnewsc 32 Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Foldsc 32 Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Fnewname 36 Type the new name for the selected AutoText component.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2Foldname 38 Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frenameautotextdialog%2FRenameAutoTextDialog 38 Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item.
1d .uno%3AAuthoritiesEntryDialog 26 Edits the selected bibliography entry.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_NEXT 39 Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_PREV 3d Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fnumformat b2 Select the format for the contents of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format.
12 .uno%3AFieldDialog 75 Opens a dialog where you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fnext 3d Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fprev 41 Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
13 .uno%3AEditFootnote 77 Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fnext 3f Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fprevious 43 Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flast 3f Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ffirst 40 Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fdelete 59 Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ftypecb 3e Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectindexdialog%2FSelectIndexDialog 66 Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2FIndexEntryDialog 66 Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
17 .uno%3AIndexEntryDialog 66 Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fremove 6a Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Ftree 58 Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2FEditSectionDialog 3c Changes the properties of sections defined in your document.
11 .uno%3AEditRegion 3c Changes the properties of sections defined in your document.
c .uno%3ARuler 9b Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page.
11 .uno%3AViewBounds 62 Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed.
c .uno%3AMarks 76 Shows or hides field shadings in your document, including non-breaking spaces, custom hyphens, indexes, and footnotes.
11 .uno%3AFieldnames 42 Switches the field display between field names and field contents.
13 .uno%3AControlCodes 67 Shows nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
11 .uno%3ABrowseView 2f Displays the document as seen in a Web browser.
12 .uno%3APrintLayout 36 Displays how the document will look when you print it.
1b .uno%3AShowHiddenParagraphs 21 Shows or hides hidden paragraphs.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagenumsb 4a Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fstylelb 46 Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fcolumnrb ee Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new column.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagenumcb c7 Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Flinerb 7e Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2FBreakDialog 59 Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbreak%2Fpagerb cc Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a nonprinting border at the top of the new page.
12 .uno%3AInsertBreak 59 Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position.
14 .uno%3AInsertSection 137 Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose this command to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply custom column layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fcondition 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fhide 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fwithpassword 60 Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Ffile 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fprotect 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fprotect 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fsection 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fsectionname 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fselectfile 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fpassword 39 Opens a dialog where you can change the current password.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Ffilename 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fsectionnames 20 Type a name for the new section.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fdde 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fwithcond 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2FSectionPage 20 Type a name for the new section.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Flink 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fhide 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fselectpassword 39 Opens a dialog where you can change the current password.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fdde 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Flink 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Fwithpassword 60 Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsectionpage%2Ffilename 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Feditsectiondialog%2Fcurname 20 Type a name for the new section.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findentpage%2Fafter 3d Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findentpage%2Fbefore 3d Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findentpage%2FIndentPage 3d Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Ffootnote 78 Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fchoosecharacter 3d Inserts a special character  as a footnote or endnote anchor.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fcharacterentry 4c Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fcharacter 4c Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fautomatic 57 Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2FInsertFootnoteDialog 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
14 .uno%3AInsertEndnote 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertfootnote%2Fendnote 79 Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document.
15 .uno%3AInsertFootnote 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
1b .uno%3AInsertFootnoteDialog 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2Fdelete 8a To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2Fbookmarks c0 Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the current document. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertbookmark%2FInsertBookmarkDialog 81 Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time.
15 .uno%3AInsertBookmark 81 Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fposition 62 Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fseparator_edit 51 Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fnum_seperator_edit 3f Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fnumbering 41 Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fauto 90 Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialog box.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Fcategory e6 Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2FInsertCaptionDialog 5b Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
1a .uno%3AInsertCaptionDialog 5b Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Fstyle 21 Especifica o estilo de carácter.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Fseparator 5e Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Flevel 6f Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2FCaptionOptionsDialog 6f Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcaptionoptions%2Fborder_and_shadow 2c Engade un bordo ou sombra ao marco da lenda.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertcaption%2Foptions c2 Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
15 SW_HID_ENVELOP_INSERT 37 Define a aparencia dos cambios realizados no documento.
14 SW_HID_ENVELOP_PRINT 30 Creates a new document and inserts the envelope.
15 .uno%3AInsertEnvelope 14 Creates an envelope.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Finsert b0 Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Ffield b0 Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Ftable 4e Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Fdatabase 48 Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_SEND 6b Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return  address.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Fsenderedit 6b Includes a return address on the envelope. Select the Sender check box, and then enter the return  address.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2Faddredit 1b Enter the delivery address.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvaddresspage%2FEnvAddressPage 96 Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fheight 21 Enter the height of the envelope.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fsenderedit 56 Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fformat 79 Select the envelope size that want, or select "User Defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Ftopsender 6b Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fleftsender 6c Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Faddredit 59 Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fwidth 20 Enter the width of the envelope.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Frightaddr 6e Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2Fleftaddr 6f Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvformatpage%2FEnvFormatPage 37 Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fsetup 74 Opens the Print Setup dialog where you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fdown 2e Enter the amount to shift the print area down.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fright 36 Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fvertright 46 Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fvertcenter 42 Feeds the envelope vertically from the center of the printer tray.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fbottom 45 Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fvertleft 45 Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fhoriright 48 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fhoricenter 44 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the center of the printer tray.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Ftop 43 Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2Fhorileft 47 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fenvprinterpage%2FEnvPrinterPage 27 Set the print options for the envelope.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffielddialog%2Fcancel 1a Pecha a caixa de diálogo.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffielddialog%2Fok 77 Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialog, click the Close button.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffielddialog%2FFieldDialog 2f Inserts a field at the current cursor position.
12 .uno%3AInsertField 2f Inserts a field at the current cursor position.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Foffset 40 Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Flevel 50 Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Ffixed 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fformat 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fvalue 57 Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Fselect 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocumentpage%2FFldDocumentPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fvalue f Edit the value.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fformat 48 Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fselecttip b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fname 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Ftype 91 Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2FFldRefPage bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldrefpage%2Fselect b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
1b .uno%3AInsertReferenceField bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_NEXT 42 Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_EDIT 4e Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialog, where you can edit the Input list.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fdown 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3ALB_LISTITEMS 48 Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fremove 28 Removes the selected item from the list.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fup 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Flistitems 3b Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fadd 1a Adds the Item to the list.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Flistname 27 Enter a unique name for the Input list.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fitem 11 Enter a new item.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fcond1 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fmacro 79 Opens the Macro Selector, where you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fcond2 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fformat 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fvalue 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2Fname 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldfuncpage%2FFldFuncPage 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2Ffixed 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2Fformat 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2Fselect 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddocinfopage%2FFldDocInfoPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fdelete 7d Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fseparator 5d Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fapply 32 Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Flevel 52 Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Finvisible 29 Hides the field contents in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fselect 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fformat 48 In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fvalue 40 Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fname 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Fnumformat 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffldvarpage%2FFldVarPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fformat 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fbrowse 82 Opens a file open dialog where you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Frecnumber 62 Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fcondition 3a For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fnumformat 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fselect 54 Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Ftype 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
15 SW_HID_PRINT_AS_MERGE d1 When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialog asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialog opens where you can select the database records to print.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Fuserdefinedcb 47 Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2Ffromdatabasecb 31 Uses the format defined in the selected database.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fflddbpage%2FFldDbPage 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finputfielddialog%2Fnext 2e Jumps to the next input field in the document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finputfielddialog%2Ftext b5 The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finputfielddialog%2FInputFieldDialog 4f Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Finsert 22 Marks an index entry in your text.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fsearchcasesensitivecb 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fapplytoallcb 8f Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fnew 53 Opens the Create New User-defined Index dialog where you can create a custom index.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fclose 1a Pecha a caixa de diálogo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fmainentrycb 40 Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fphonetic0ed f9 Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fkey2cb c9 Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold".
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fkey1cb b2 Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold".
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fentryed a6 Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Fsearchcasewordonlycb 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Flevelnf c9 Entries using the paragraph format "Heading X" (X = 1-10) can be automatically added to the table of contents. The level of the entry in the index corresponds to the outline level of the heading style.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2Ftypecb 33 Select the index that you want to add the entry to.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnewuserindexdialog%2FNewUserIndexDialog 70 Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Findexentry%2FIndexEntryDialog 3c Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
19 .uno%3AInsertIndexesEntry 3c Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
17 .uno%3AInsertMultiIndex 47 Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fedit 54 Opens the Paragraph Style dialog, where you can modify the selected paragraph style.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fdefault 4d Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fassign 43 Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Fstyles 74 Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2Flevels 39 Select the index level that you change the formatting of.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocstylespage%2FTocStylesPage 39 Select the index level that you change the formatting of.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Findexmarks 6a Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry in the index.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fstyles 62 Opens the Assign Styles dialog, where you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Faddstylescb e1 Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialog as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Flevel 3b Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fscope 4f Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Freadonly 36 Prevents the contents of the index from being changed.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ftype 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromheadings 96 Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ftitle 25 Enter a title for the selected index.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2FTocIndexPage 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fkeytype aa Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromfile 64 Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fkeyasentry 2d Inserts index keys as separate index entries.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Finitcaps 3d Automatically capitalizes the first letter of an index entry.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffile 2b Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcasesens 7f Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fusedash d2 Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range where the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12".
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fuseff 11b Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p".
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Flang 3f Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcombinesame c3 Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43".
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fobjnames 28 Creates index entries from object names.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fdisplay 46 Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcategory 47 Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fcaptions 2b Creates index entries from object captions.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fuselevel 78 Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromoles 22 Includes OLE objects in the index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromframes 22 Includes text frames in the index.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromgraphics 1f Includes graphics in the index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Ffromtables 1d Includes tables in the index.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fobjects 47 Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fbrackets 42 Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocindexpage%2Fnumberentries 2f Automatically numbers the bibliography entries.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignstylesdialog%2Fright 49 Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignstylesdialog%2Fleft 47 Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fassignstylesdialog%2FAssignStylesDialog 35 Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2FTocEntriesPage 9b Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Index/Table tab.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Freltostyle c1 Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fnumberformat 7d Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Falignright 2d Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ftabstoppos 4a Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fedit 3f Opens a dialog where you can edit the selected character style.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ffillchar 28 Select the tab leader that you want use.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fcharstyle 49 Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fall 38 Applies the current settings without closing the dialog.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fhyperlink 1aa Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fpageno 25 Inserts the page number of the entry.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ftabstop de Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or select the Align right check box.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fentrytext 28 Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fchapterno 6d Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Ftoken 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fmainstyle cf Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fentryoutlinelevel 59 Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fcommasep 41 Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fchapterentry 4b Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Falphadelim 5a Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fchapterinfo 8e Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fdown3cb 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fdown1cb 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fup3cb 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fup1cb 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fkey3lb 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fkey2lb 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fkey1lb 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fdown2cb 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fsortpos 5d Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fremove 3c Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Finsert a2 Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fup2cb 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fsortcontent 73 Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftocentriespage%2Fauthfield 7b To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert.
20 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHORITY_TYPE 2d Select the source for the bibliography entry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM4 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM2 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NUMBER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CHAPTER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1f SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ORGANIZATIONS 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_MONTH 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITION 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PAGES 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHOR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ISBN 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PUBLISHER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM3 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_YEAR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SERIES 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NOTE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITOR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1e SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_HOWPUBLISHED 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM5 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_JOURNAL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SCHOOL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
15 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_URL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1c SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_IDENTIFIER 80 Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ADDRESS 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_TITLE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM1 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_BOOKTITLE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ANNOTE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1d SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_INSTITUTION 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_VOLUME 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcreateauthorentry%2FCreateAuthorEntryDialog 2b Change the content of a bibliography entry.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcreateautomarkdialog%2FCreateAutomarkDialog 43 Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fedit 5f Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog where you can edit the selected bibliography record.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fclose 1a Pecha a caixa de diálogo.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fentryed 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Finsert b2 Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fentrylb 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Ffromdocument 5a Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Fnew db Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialog, where you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2Ffrombibliography 33 Inserts a reference from the bibliography database.
1d .uno%3AInsertAuthoritiesEntry 21 Inserts a bibliography reference.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbibliographyentry%2FBibliographyEntryDialog 21 Inserts a bibliography reference.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 7d Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame.
12 .uno%3AInsertFrame 5f Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fautoformat 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fbordercb 21 Adds a border to the table cells.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fdontsplitcb 34 Prevents the table from spanning more than one page.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frepeatheaderspin 3f Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fheadercb 24 Includes a heading row in the table.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fcolspin 37 Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Fnameedit 1b Enter a name for the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frepeatcb 65 Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2Frowspin 34 Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finserttable%2FInsertTableDialog a8 Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable a8 Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Fdefine 68 Replaces the current data source with the data source that you selected in the Available Databases list.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Fbrowse 77 Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Favailablelb 38 Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2Finuselb 2e Lists the databases that are currently in use.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fexchangedatabases%2FExchangeDatabasesDialog 31 Change the data sources for the current document.
1a .uno%3AChangeDatabaseField 31 Change the data sources for the current document.
10 .uno%3AInsertDoc 33 Inserts a text file at the current cursor position.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Ftext 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Ftextentry 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Furlentry b1 Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fbrowse 47 Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Furl b1 Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fscripttype 31 Enter the type of script that you want to insert.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fnext 14 Jump to Next Script.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2Fprevious 18 Jump to Previous Script.
13 .uno%3AInsertScript 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertscript%2FInsertScriptDialog 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageHeader 92 Adds or removes a header from the page style that you select in the submenu. The header is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageFooter 92 Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinWidow 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinOrphan 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckWidow 98 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckOrphan 8a Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinPageNumber 8b Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0".
27 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckKeepPara 6a Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckPageStyle 6e Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcomboBreakPosition 2a Select where you want to insert the break.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcomboBreakType 2e Select the break type that you want to insert.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckInsert 4b Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinMaxNum 45 Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinLineEnd 63 Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcomboPageStyle 46 Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break.
27 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FspinLineBegin 66 Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckAuto 43 Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FcheckSplitPara 51 Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextflowpage%2FTextFlowPage 2b Specify hyphenation and pagination options.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FcomboBOX_TEMPLATE 44 Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FspinFLD_DISTANCE 63 Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FspinFLD_LINES 98 Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FentryEDT_TEXT 63 Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FspinFLD_DROPCAPS 37 Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FcheckCB_WORD 80 Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FcheckCB_SWITCH 38 Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fdropcapspage%2FDropCapPage b1 Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_RESTART_PARA 37 Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering
2d sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_COUNT_PARA 35 Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_NEW_START 3a Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NUMBER_NEW_START 5a Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
2c sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NEW_START 30 Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph.
34 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_RESTART_PARACOUNT 56 Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ALB_NUMBER_STYLE 43 Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph.
26 SW_LISTBOX_TP_NUMPARA_LB_OUTLINE_LEVEL 54 Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style.
e SW_HID_NUMPARA a7 Adds or removes outline level, numbering, or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list.
11 .uno%3APageDialog 8e Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fautowidth 1f Creates columns of equal width.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Flineheightmf 58 Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fnext 31 Moves the column display one column to the right.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fspacing2mf 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fspacing1mf 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fback 30 Moves the column display one column to the left.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fwidth3mf 1e Enter the width of the column.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fwidth1mf 1e Enter the width of the column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Flinestylelb 6e Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None".
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Flineposlb 81 Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fwidth2mf 1e Enter the width of the column.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fbalance 93 Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fvalueset 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fapplytolb 3c Select the item that you want to apply the column layout to.
17 .uno%3APageColumnDialog 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2FColumnPage 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Fcolsnf 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
14 .uno%3AFormatColumns 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEDIST 66 Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINETYPE 69 Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt".
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINEPOS 61 Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEWIDTH 4e Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_MAXHEIGHT 2f Enter the maximum height for the footnote area.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT 57 Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT_PAGE 5b Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_DIST 72 Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area.
14 SW_HID_FOOTNOTE_PAGE 7a Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendprefix 46 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendoffset 35 Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendntnum 3e Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify.
41 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendnumviewbox 2c Select the numbering style for the endnotes.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendntattextend 28 Adds endnotes at the end of the section.
41 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnnumviewbox 2d Select the numbering style for the footnotes.
3f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendntnumfmt 31 Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnsuffix 42 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnoffset 36 Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnprefix 48 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnntnum 3f Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnnntnumfmt 32 Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fftnntattextend aa Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2Fendsuffix 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number.
4c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotesendnotestabpage%2FFootnotesEndnotesTabPage 58 Specifies where footnotes and endnotes are displayed as well as their numbering formats.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FcheckCB_PRINT 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FcheckCB_DISPLAY 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FcheckCB_RUBYBELOW 39 Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinMF_RUBYSIZE 26 Enter the font size for the Ruby text.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinMF_TEXTSIZE 54 Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in less characters per line.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FlistLB_COLOR 3a Specifies the printing and color options of the text grid.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinNF_CHARSPERLINE 3f Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FspinNF_LINESPERPAGE 3a Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FradioRB_LINESGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FradioRB_CHARSGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftextgridpage%2FradioRB_NOGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
14 .uno%3AGraphicDialog 49 Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Ffollowtextflow b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fvertanchor 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fbyvert 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fvertpos 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fvertpos 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fbyhori 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fbyvert 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Forigsize 47 Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fbyhori 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fhorianchor 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fmirror 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2FSwPosSizePage 4e Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fhoripos 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fhoripos 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Faschar 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fmirror 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ftopara 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ffollowtextflow b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fautoheight a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Ftochar 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fratio 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fheight 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ftopage 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Faschar 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fwidth 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Ftochar 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fratio 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fautowidth a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fwidth 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Ftopara 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Frelwidth 5f Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page text area.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fheight 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2FFrmTypePage 4e Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Ftopage 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
22 %2Fui%2Fswpossizepage%2Fhorianchor 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Fvertanchor 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmtypepage%2Frelheight 61 Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page text area.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Ftop 58 Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Foutside 60 Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape.
12 .uno%3AWrapContour 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Foutline 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
f .uno%3ATextWrap 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
d .uno%3AWrapOn 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
1d .uno%3AWrapThroughTransparent 71 Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fbefore 43 Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fthrough 27 Places the object in front of the text.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fleft 59 Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2FWrapPage 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
15 .uno%3AWrapAnchorOnly 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
10 .uno%3AWrapIdeal ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
12 .uno%3AWrapThrough 27 Places the object in front of the text.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fparallel 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fbottom 5b Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fafter 44 Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Ftransparent 71 Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fright 5a Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text.
e .uno%3AWrapOff 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Foptimal ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fanchoronly 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwrappage%2Fnone 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
f .uno%3AWrapMenu 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR%3AMTF_TOLERANCE 97 Enter the color tolerance for the Color Replacer as a percentage. To increase the color range that the Color Replacer selects, enter a high percentage.
1b SVX_HID_CONTDLG_AUTOCONTOUR 42 Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYINSERT 79 Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYDELETE 67 Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLY 184 Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_UNDO 19 Reverses the last action.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_CIRCLE 3b Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_SELECT 3e Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour.
15 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_APPLY 2b Applies the contour to the selected object.
17 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_PIPETTE c1 Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_GRAPHWND 22 Displays a preview of the contour.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYMOVE 4c Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour.
19 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_WORKPLACE 4b Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYEDIT 5f Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour.
14 .uno%3AContourDialog 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_REDO 2d Reverses the action of the last Undo command.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_RECT 73 Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag.
29 svx%3AFloatingWindow%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fentry 92 Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the browse button (...) and then locate the file that you want to link to.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fbrowse 4a Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fleftpages 3b Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on even pages.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fallpages 35 Flips the selected graphic horizontally on all pages.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Frightpages 3a Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fhori 28 Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
13 .uno%3AFlipVertical 28 Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
15 .uno%3AFlipHorizontal 26 Flips the selected graphic vertically.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2Fvert 26 Flips the selected graphic vertically.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpicturepage%2FPicturePage 3f Specify the flip and the link options for the selected graphic.
14 CUI_HID_MACRO_MACROS 72 Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign.
13 CUI_HID_MACRO_GROUP 3f Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs.
1e CUI_HID_MACRO_HEADERTABLISTBOX 2a Lists the events that can trigger a macro.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fserver 1d Uses a server-side image map.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fclient 3c Uses the image map that you created for the selected object.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fname 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Fsearch 49 Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2Furl 3a Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmurlpage%2FFrmURLPage 56 Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprintframe 37 Includes the selected item when you print the document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Ftextflow a3 Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprotectsize 24 Locks the size of the selected item.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprotectframe 40 Locks the position of the selected item in the current document.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fnext df Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprev f8 Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Faltname 91 Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Feditinreadonly 5d Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected).
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fname 23 Enter a name for the selected item.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2Fprotectcontent 36 Prevents changes to the contents of the selected item.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffrmaddpage%2FFrmAddPage 3f Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
12 .uno%3AFrameDialog 6a Opens a dialog where you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 7d Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fbelowmf 73 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fleftmf 68 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ffree 71 Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fcenter 2b Centers the table horizontally on the page.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fright 3c Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ffromleft 63 Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Frightmf 69 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fleft 3a Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ffull 49 Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Frelwidth 42 Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fwidthmf 1d Enter the width of the table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fname 69 Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Fabovemf 70 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2FFormatTablePage 52 Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fnext 44 Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fback 43 Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth6 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth5 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth4 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth3 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth2 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fwidth1 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fspace-nospin 8a Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fadaptcolumns 42 If possible, change in column width will be equal for each column.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2Fadaptwidth 3c Reduces or increases table width with modified column width.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftablecolumnpage%2FTableColumnPage 3c Reduces or increases table width with modified column width.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Frepeatheadermf 33 Enter the number of rows to include in the heading.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fkeep 4f Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break.
f .uno%3ARowSplit 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fsplit 40 Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpagenonf 40 Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpagestylelb 56 Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpagestyle 56 Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fheadline 50 Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fsplitrow 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fbefore 30 Inserts a page or column break before the table.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fcolumn 48 Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fafter 2f Inserts a page or column break after the table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fpage 2f Inserts a page break before or after the table.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Fvertorient 3f Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2Ftextdirection 31 Select the orientation for the text in the cells.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftabletextflowpage%2FTableTextFlowPage 42 Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
e .uno%3AProtect 40 Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
19 .uno%3AUnsetCellsReadOnly 48 Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table.
28 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frowheight%2Ffit 48 Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frowheight%2Fheightmf 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s).
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Frowheight%2FRowHeightDialog 2a Changes the height of the selected row(s).
13 .uno%3ASetRowHeight 2a Changes the height of the selected row(s).
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 45 Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 29 Selects the row that contains the cursor.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 2b Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2Fwidth 39 Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2Fcolumn 46 Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnwidth%2FColumnWidthDialog 2c Changes the width of the selected column(s).
15 .uno%3ASetColumnWidth 2c Changes the width of the selected column(s).
1c .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidth 47 Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 2c Selects the column that contains the cursor.
19 .uno%3AInsertColumnDialog 20 Inserts a column into the table.
16 .uno%3AInsertRowDialog 1d Inserts a row into the table.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 2e Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ARID_STYLECATALOG%3ABT_TOOL 38 These are the different categories of formatting styles.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fremove 48 Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fstyles 5f A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fapply 4a Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Flinks c7 Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2Fcondstyle 3c Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconditionpage%2FConditionPage 3c Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE a5 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN a0 Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style.
10 .uno%3AListStyle 3b Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists.
10 .uno%3APageStyle 25 Displays formatting styles for pages.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 59 Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection.
11 .uno%3AFrameStyle 26 Displays formatting styles for frames.
10 .uno%3ACharStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for characters.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for paragraphs.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 75 Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 89 Use the Styles and Formatting window to apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply the style.
17 .uno%3AOnlineAutoFormat 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
16 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EXEC 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fpatterncb 37 Includes background styles in the selected table style.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fbordercb 33 Includes border styles in the selected table style.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Falignmentcb 38 Includes alignment settings in the selected table style.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Ffontcb 35 Includes font formatting in the selected table style.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fnumformatcb 37 Includes numbering formats in the selected table style.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fadd 23 Adds a new table style to the list.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fremove 21 Deletes the selected table style.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Fformatlb 6d Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2Frename 5b Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fautoformattable%2FAutoFormatTableDialog 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
11 .uno%3AAutoFormat 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpercentdialog%2FPercentDialog 61 Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width.
16 .uno%3AAutoFormatApply 66 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrectOptions.
1a SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EDIT_CHG 91 Opens a dialog where you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_REJECT 26 Rejects all of the formatting changes.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_ACCEPT 26 Applies all of the formatting changes.
1d .uno%3AAutoFormatRedlineApply a3 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialog, you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_MERGE_STYLE 5e Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_PAGE_STYLE 4b Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_PAGE 4b Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_FRAME_STYLE 4c Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document.
13 SW_HID_LTEMPL_FRAME 4c Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document.
17 SW_HID_LTEMPL_NUMBERING 50 Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_TEXT_STYLE 62 Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_TEMPLATE 38 Lists the available templates for the selected category.
2d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_NUM_STYLE 50 Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_TEXT 62 Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document.
29 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_REGION 65 Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list.
2f sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3APB_LOAD_FILE 51 Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open.
16 SW_HID_LTEMPL_OVERRIDE 5e Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading.
11 .uno%3ALoadStyles 56 Imports formatting styles from another document or template into the current document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcustomheading 34 Inserts an additional blank row in the second table.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcustomheadingapplystyle 77 Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fcopyheading 52 Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2Fnoheading 30 Splits the table without copying the header row.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsplittable%2FSplitTableDialog 49 Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position.
11 .uno%3ASplitTable 49 Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmergetabledialog%2FMergeTableDialog 8c Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph.
11 .uno%3AMergeTable 8c Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fdelete 3e Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word.
19 cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fok 2d Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fright 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fleft 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fworded 3d Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2Fcontinue 48 Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fhyphenate%2FHyphenateDialog 47 Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 47 Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line.
16 .uno%3AWordCountDialog 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fwordcount%2FWordCountDialog 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumberingnamedialog%2Fform 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2Fsaveas 8e Opens a dialog where you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2Fform1 5c Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2Fuser 6a Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fnumberingnamedialog%2Fentry 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumbering%2FOutlineNumberingDialog 4f Especifica o formato numérico e a xerarquía para a numeración de capítulos.
1d .uno%3AChapterNumberingDialog 4f Especifica o formato numérico e a xerarquía para a numeración de capítulos.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fstartat 43 Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fsublevelsnf 94 Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fcharstyle 2d Select the format of the numbering character.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fsuffix 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fnumbering 50 Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Fstyle 51 Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2Flevel 66 Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinenumberingpage%2FOutlineNumberingPage 66 Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level.
15 .uno%3AFootnoteDialog 3a Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcontfromed c7 Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcharstylelb 5e Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcharanchorstylelb 67 Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fpagestylelb 39 Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fposdoccb 3a Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fconted ca Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fsuffix 53 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fparastylelb 31 Select the paragraph style for the footnote text.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fprefix 59 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Foffsetnf 8a Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fpospagecb 2d Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fnumberinglb 4a Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2Fcountinglb 2e Select the numbering option for the footnotes.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ffootnotepage%2FFootnotePage 34 Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fcharstylelb 5c Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fcharanchorstylelb 66 Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fpagestylelb 38 Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fparastylelb 30 Select the paragraph style for the endnote text.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fsuffix 52 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Foffsetnf 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fnumberinglb 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2Fprefix 58 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fendnotepage%2FEndnotePage 26 Specifies the formatting for endnotes.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fdontsplitcb 27 Does not divide the table across pages.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fbordercb 2f Adds a border to the table and the table cells.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Frepeatheading 3b Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fheadingcb 34 Formats the first row of the new table as a heading.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fautofmt 50 Opens the AutoFormat dialog, where you can select a predefined layout for table.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fothered 3b Type the character that you want to use as a column marker.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fparagraph 40 Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fkeepcolumn 50 Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fsemicolons 45 Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Frepeatheaderssb 25 Repeats the first n rows as a header.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Ftabs 3a Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2Fother 5d Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fconverttexttable%2FConvertTextTableDialog 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
17 .uno%3AConvertTableText 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdelimpb 6c Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select the character that you want to use as a separator.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fseparator 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcharacter 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftabs 56 If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Frows 65 Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown3 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb1 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown2 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fmatchcase 7a Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolumns 45 Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup3 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fdown1 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup1 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fup2 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb2 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Flanglb 33 Select the language that defines the sorting rules.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb3 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb1 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Ftypelb3 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fcolsb2 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
10 .uno%3ATableSort 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey3 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey2 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
2a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2Fkey1 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsortdialog%2FSortDialog 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
11 .uno%3ASortDialog 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
13 .uno%3ACalculateSel 47 Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard.
11 .uno%3ARepaginate 78 Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar.
14 .uno%3ARemoveTableOf 23 Deletes the current index or table.
13 .uno%3AEditCurIndex 21 Edits the current index or table.
15 .uno%3AUpdateCurIndex 1a Updates the current index.
17 .uno%3AUpdateAllIndexes 98 Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Frestarteverynewpage 40 Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Flinesintextframes 9f Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Flinesspin 3a Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fintervalspin 31 Enter the counting interval for the line numbers.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fspacingspin 57 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fpositiondropdown 31 Select where you want the line numbers to appear.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Ftextentry 33 Enter the text that you want to use as a separator.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fformatdropdown 30 Select the numbering style that you want to use.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fblanklines 2c Includes empty paragraphs in the line count.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fshownumbering 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2Fstyledropdown 46 Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flinenumbering%2FLineNumberingDialog 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
1a .uno%3ALineNumberingDialog 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
10 .uno%3AUpdateAll 64 Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateFields 3b Updates the contents of all fields in the current document.
15 .uno%3AUpdateAllLinks 2a Updates the links in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateCharts 2b Updates the charts in the current document.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 3e Opens a submenu to edit the properties of the selected object.
16 .uno%3AMailMergeWizard 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
12 .uno%3AMergeDialog 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Frecentdoclb 14 Select the document.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Frecentdoc 4e Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fbrowsetemplate 29 Opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fbrowsedoc 45 Locate the Writer document that you want to use, and then click Open.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Ftemplate 4a Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fnewdoc 38 Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Floaddoc 52 Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2Fcurrentdoc 49 Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmselectpage%2FMMSelectPage 49 Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputtypepage%2Femail 5c Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputtypepage%2Fletter 28 Creates a printable mail merge document.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmmoutputtypepage%2FMMOutputTypePage 28 Creates a printable mail merge document.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ASSIGN 1e Opens the Match Fields dialog.
37 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE_CB_HIDE_EMPTY_PARA 2f Enable to leave empty lines out of the address.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_SETTINGS 26 Opens the Select Address Block dialog.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3ACB_ADDRESS 31 Adds an address block to the mail merge document.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ADDRESSLIST 8d Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
2d SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_PB_ASSIGN 1e Opens the Match Fields dialog.
31 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_CB_GREETINGLINE 12 Adds a salutation.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ALB_ZOOM 2c Select a magnification for the page preview.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3APB_DOWN 1a Moves the salutation down.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_TOP 6a Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_LEFT 6c Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_UP 18 Moves the salutation up.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ACB_ALIGN 49 Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 5a Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the main mail merge document for all recipients.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_NEXT 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_PREV 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_LAST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIRST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3ACB_EXCLUDE 34 Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3AED_RECORD 64 Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_MATCHCASE 47 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters in the search.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_BACKWARDS 45 Searches from the current cursor position to the top of the document.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 3c Searches for whole words only and not parts of larger words.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIND 1a Click to start the search.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3AED_FIND 68 Enter the text that you want to search for in the merged document, for example, the name of a recipient.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 59 Minimizes the wizard so that you can edit the mail merge document for a single recipient.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDALL 29 Select to send e-mails to all recipients.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_ATTACHMENT 21 Shows the name of the attachment.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDAS 7d Opens the E-Mail Message dialog where you can enter the e-mail message for the mail merge files that are sent as attachments.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_SENDAS 2f Select the mail format for the e-mail messages.
32 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTNOW 20 Prints the mail merge documents.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDDOCUMENTS 1f Click to start sending e-mails.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDMAIL 36 Sends the output as e-mail messages to all recipients.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVESTARTDOC 1b Saves the current document.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINTALL 24 Prints documents for all recipients.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_COPYTO 4f Opens the Copy To dialog where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_PRINT 13 Select the printer.
39 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTERSETTINGS 1f Changes the printer properties.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINT 2d Prints the output for all or some recipients.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVESTARTDOC 3e Saves the starting document that contains the database fields.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_FROM 77 Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_TO 41 Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_FROM 42 Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEINDIVIDUAL cf Saves the merged document as a separate file for each recipient. The file names of the documents are constructed from the name that you enter, followed by an underscore, and the number of the current record.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_SUBJECT 2f Enter the subject line for the e-mail messages.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEASONE 2b Saves the merged document as a single file.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_MAILTO 4c Select the database field that contains the e-mail address of the recipient.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEMERGEDDOC 1a Saves the merged document.
31 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVENOW 14 Saves the documents.
27 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fccdialog%2Fbcc 4a Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
26 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fccdialog%2Fcc 44 Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fccdialog%2FCCDialog 44 Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fright 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fup 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fcustom 50 Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Faddressdest 3d Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fleft 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Ffromaddr 2f Removes the selected field from the other list.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Fdown 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Ftoaddr 73 Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2Faddresses 34 Select a field and drag the field to the other list.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Faddressblockdialog%2FAddressBlockDialog 34 Select a field and drag the field to the other list.
29 SW_MULTILINEEDIT_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_MLE_BODY 22 Enter the main text of the e-mail.
2b SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_CB_GREETINGLINE 20 Adds a salutation to the e-mail.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fdelete 2a Deletes the selected address block layout.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fedit 58 Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can edit the selected address block layout.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fnew 53 Opens the New Address Block dialog where you can define a new address block layout.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fcountry 3a Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fdependent 86 Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Falways 3e Includes country or regional information in the address block.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2Fnever 40 Excludes country or regional information from the address block.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectblockdialog%2FSelectBlockDialog 59 Select the block in the list that you want to use for mail merge addresses, and click OK.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fchangetable 58 Opens the Select Table dialog, where you can select another table to use for mail merge.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fedit 50 Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can edit the selected address list.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Ffilter 82 Opens the Standard Filter dialog , where you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fadd 5d Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2Fcreate 4b Opens the New Address List dialog, where you can create a new address list.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fselectaddressdialog%2FSelectAddressDialog 5d Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG%3APB_PREVIEW 27 Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialog.
26 SW_HID_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG_LISTBOX 3f Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses.
17 .uno%3ADefaultNumbering 3e Engade ou elimina a numeración dos parágrafos seleccionados.
12 .uno%3AChainFrames 2c Liga o marco seleccionado ao marco seguinte.
13 .uno%3AUnhainFrames 14 Desliga dous marcos.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows e2 Inserir unha ou máis filas na táboa, na parte inferior da selección. Pode inserir máis dunha fila abrindo a caixa de diálogo (escolla  Táboa - Inserir - Filas), ou seleccionando máis dunha fila antes de premer na icona.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns e4 Inserir unha ou máis columnas na táboa, despois da selección. Para inserir varias columnas ao mesmo tempo, abra a caixa de diálogo (escolla Táboa - Inserir - Columnas), ou selccione varias columnas antes de premer na icona.
13 .uno%3ATableModeFix 75 Se este modo está activo os cambios realizados nunha fila e/ou columna só afectan ás filas ou columnas adxacentes.
17 .uno%3ATableModeFixProp 5d Se este modo está activo os cambios realizados na fila e/ou columna afectan a toda a táboa.
18 .uno%3ATableModeVariable 65 Se este modo está activo os cambios realizados nunha fila e/ou columna afectan ao tamaño da táboa.
e .uno%3AAutoSum 69 Activa a función de suma. Teña en conta que o cursor debe estar na cela onde desexa que apareza a suma.
14 .uno%3ARemoveBullets 51 Desactiva a numeración ou as viñetas no parágrafo actual ou nos seleccionados.
19 .uno%3ADecrementSubLevels 39 Move os parágrafos con subpuntos un nivel cara a abaixo.
19 .uno%3AIncrementSubLevels 39 Move os parágrafos con subpuntos un nivel cara a arriba.
1d .uno%3AInsertNeutralParagraph 52 Inserir un parágrafo sen numeración. A numeración existente non se ve afectada.
15 .uno%3AMoveUpSubItems 4a Move un parágrafo con subpuntos e o coloca enriba do parágrafo anterior.
17 .uno%3AMoveDownSubItems 47 Sitúa un parágrafo cos seus subpuntos debaixo do seguinte parágrafo.
15 .uno%3ANumberingStart 20 Reinicia a numeración do texto.
16 .uno%3AStatePageNumber 110 O número da páxina actual móstrase neste campo da barra de estado. Para navegar polo documento prema dúas veces para abrir o Navegador. Prema co botón dereito do rato para mostrar os marcadores existentes. Prema nun marcador para colocar o cursor do texto nese lugar.
14 .uno%3AStatusBarFunc 28 Mostra a información sobre o documento.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 43 Aumenta o zoom para obter unha visión máis achegada do documento.
10 .uno%3AZoomMinus 2f Reduce o zoom para ver máis nun tamaño menor.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 2f Reduce o zoom para ver máis nun tamaño menor.
14 SW_HID_PVIEW_ZOOM_LB 3a Determina o nivel de zoom da previsualización de páxina.
13 .uno%3AShowTwoPages 3d Mostra dúas páxinas na xanela Previsualización de páxina.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpreviewzoomdialog%2Fcols 33 Define o número de páxinas mostradas en columnas.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpreviewzoomdialog%2Frows 27 Define o número de filas das páxinas.
18 .uno%3AShowMultiplePages d5 Define o número de páxinas mostradas na pantalla. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir unha grade e seleccionar o número de páxinas que desexa mostrar como filas e columnas na previsualización.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fpreviewzoomdialog%2FPreviewZoomDialog d5 Define o número de páxinas mostradas na pantalla. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir unha grade e seleccionar o número de páxinas que desexa mostrar como filas e columnas na previsualización.
12 .uno%3APreviewZoom d5 Define o número de páxinas mostradas na pantalla. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir unha grade e seleccionar o número de páxinas que desexa mostrar como filas e columnas na previsualización.
13 .uno%3AShowBookview 4d Selecciónea para mostrar a primeira páxina á dereita da previsualización.
3c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3APB_STANDARD a6 Specifies that the system will not use a fixed number of rows and columns when printing out the page view, but rather uses what was originally shown in the page view.
3e sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 24 Prints the page in landscape format.
3d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PORTRAIT 23 Prints the page in portrait format.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_HMARGIN 40 Determina a distancia horizontal entre as páxinas do documento.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_RMARGIN 21 Specifies the right margin width.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_VMARGIN 3e Determina a distancia vertical entre as páxinas do documento.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_TMARGIN 20 Specifies the top margin height.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_LMARGIN 20 Specifies the left margin width.
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_COLS 4f Defines the number of pages shown in columns (vertically tiled document pages).
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_ROWS 4a Defines the number of rows of pages (horizontally stacked document pages).
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_BMARGIN 23 Specifies the bottom margin height.
1a .uno%3APreviewPrintOptions 4c Opens a dialog where settings for the printout of your document can be made.
18 FN_PREVIEW_PRINT_OPTIONS 4c Opens a dialog where settings for the printout of your document can be made.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ACOS 22 Calcula o arco coseno en radiáns.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MIN 2d Calcula o valor mínimo dunha área ou lista.
18 SW_HID_MN_POP_STATISTICS 33 Escolla entre as seguintes funcións estatísticas:
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NOT 2d Proba os valores coincidentes co NON booleano
17 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CALC 39 Abre un submenú, que permite inserir fórmulas en celas.
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_EQ 30 Comproba se os valores seleccionados son iguais.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_XOR 39 Comproba se os valores coinciden co exclusivo booleano OU
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SUM 27 Calcula a suma das celas seleccionadas.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GRE 3b Comproba se os valores son maiores que o valor especificado
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MAX 2d Calcula o valor máximo dunha área ou lista.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_PHD 17 Calcula unha porcentaxe
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_OR 2f Comproba se os valores coinciden co OU booleano
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SIN 1a Calcula o seno en radiáns
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SQRT 18 Calcula a raíz cadrada.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GEQ 41 Comproba se un valor é maior ou igual a outro valor especificado
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NEQ 34 Verifica se os valores seleccionados son diferentes.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ATAN 24 Calcula o arco tanxente en radiáns.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_TAN 1f Calcula a tanxente en radiáns.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LES 3b Comproba se os valores son menores que o valor especificado
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_AND 2b Proba os valores coincidentes co E booleano
11 SW_HID_MN_POP_OPS 2b Pode inserir varios operadores na fórmula.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ASIN 20 Calcula o arco seno en radiáns.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_COS 1d Calcula o coseno en radiáns.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MEAN 3d Calcula a media aritmética dos valores dunha área ou lista.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LEQ 42 Verifica se un valor é menor ou igual a outro valor especificado.
12 SW_HID_MN_POP_FUNC 36 Escolla entre as seguintes funcións trigonométricas:
16 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LISTSEP 20 Separa os elementos dunha lista.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_POW 1f Calcula a potencia dun número.
14 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ROUND 38 Arredonda un número conforme os decimais especificados.
19 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CANCEL 41 Limpa o contido da liña de entrada e pecha a barra de fórmulas.
18 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_APPLY 91 Transfire o contido da liña de entrada ao documento e pecha a barra de fórmula. O contido da liña de entrada insírese na posición do cursor.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_FORMULA 89 Permite crear fórmulas ao teclear directamente na liña de entrada ou ao premer na icona Fórmula para mostrar as fórmulas no submenú.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl 68 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións para a inserción de marcos, imaxes, táboas e outros obxectos.
12 SW_HID_INSERT_CTRL 68 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións para a inserción de marcos, imaxes, táboas e outros obxectos.
16 .uno%3AInsertFieldCtrl 6c Prema para abrir a caixa de diálogo Campos. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir o submenú.
15 HID_INSERT_FIELD_CTRL 6c Prema para abrir a caixa de diálogo Campos. Prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona para abrir o submenú.
16 .uno%3AInsertDateField 23 Insire a data actual como un campo.
16 .uno%3AInsertTimeField 20 Insire a hora actual como campo.
1c .uno%3AInsertPageNumberField 48 Insire o número da páxina actual como un campo na posición do cursor.
1b .uno%3AInsertPageCountField 3e Insire como un campo o número total de páxinas do documento.
17 .uno%3AInsertTopicField 45 Insire como campo o asunto especificado nas propiedades do documento.
17 .uno%3AInsertTitleField 49 Insire como un campo o título especificado nas propiedades do documento.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 48 Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field.
e .uno%3AGraphic a4 Se a icona Activar/Desactivar imaxe  da barra Ferramentas está activada, non se mostra ningunha imaxe e os marcos baleiros móstranse como marcadores de posición.
13 .uno%3AShadowCursor 2b Activates or deactivates the direct cursor.
15 .uno%3AStateWordCount b2 The number of words in the document and selection is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the word count dialog, which shows extra document statistics.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 5b Estas orde aplícanselle ao documento actual, abra un documento novo ou peche o aplicativo.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 45 Este menú contén ordes para editar os contidos do documento actual.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 51 Este menú contén ordes para controlar a presentación en pantalla do documento.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu c6 O menú Inserir contén ordes para inserción de elementos novos no documento. Isto inclúe seccións, notas, notas a pé, comentarios, caracteres especiais, gráficos e obxecto doutros aplicativos.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 40 Contén ordes para formatar o deseño e o contido de documentos.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu ca Contén ferramentas de corrección, unha galería de obxectos de arte que pode engadir ao seu documento, así como ferramentas para configuración de menús e configuración de preferencias do programa.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 40 Contén ordes para manipular e visualizar xanelas de documentos.
11 .uno%3AEntireCell 19 Selecciona a cela actual.
19 .uno%3AConvertTableToText 49 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode converter a táboa actual en texto.
18 .uno%3AHeadingRowsRepeat 69 Se a táboa se estende por máis dunha páxina, repite as cabeceiras das táboas nas páxinas seguintes .
12 .uno%3ASelectTable 1b Seleccione a táboa actual.
12 .uno%3ADeleteTable 18 Elimina a táboa actual.
19 .uno%3AConvertTextToTable 4f Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode converter en táboa o texto seleccionado.
10 .uno%3ATableMenu 57 Mostra ordes para inserir, editar e eliminar unha táboa dentro dun documento de texto.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 2c O texto introdúcese da esquerda á dereita.
d .uno%3AShrink 38 Reduce o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 65 O texto formatado nunha lingua de disposición complexa de texto introdúcese da dereita á esquerda.
b .uno%3AGrow 39 Aumenta o tamaño do tipo de letra do texto seleccionado.
10 HID_TEXT_TOOLBOX 41 A barra Formatado contén varias funcións de formatado de texto.
12 HID_GRAFIK_TOOLBOX 58 A barra Imaxe contén funcións de formatado e posicionamento de imaxes de mapa de bits.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX 7a A barra Táboa contén as funcións necesarias para traballar con táboas. Aparece se sitúa o cursor dentro dunha táboa.
10 HID_DRAW_TOOLBOX 149 Pódese ver a barra Propiedades do obxecto de debuxo no Writer e no Calc. Seleccione o menu Ver - Barras de ferramentas - Propiedades do obxecto de debuxo. Os controis activaranse cando seleccione un obxecto de debuxo. Veranse algunhas iconas diferentes predeterminadas, cando o documento sexa de texto ou unha folla de cálculo.
f HID_NUM_TOOLBOX b8 A barra Viñetas e numeración contén funcións para modificar a estrutura dos parágrafos numerados, incluído o cambio de orde dos parágrafos ou a definición de diferentes niveis.
11 .uno%3AZoomSlider b8 Arrastre o control de zoom deslizante á esquerda para mostrar máis páxinas, arrastre cara a dereita para aumentar dentro dunha páxina e mostrar unha área máis pequena da páxina.
11 .uno%3AViewLayout c6 As iconas do deseño de visualización móstranse de esquerda a dereita: modo de columna única. Modo de visualización con páxinas a cada lado. Modo libro con dúas páxinas coma nun libro aberto.
15 .uno%3ALanguageStatus 19b Mostra o idioma do texto seleccionado. Prema para abrir un menú onde poida escoller outro idioma para o texto seleccionado ou para o parágrafo actual. Seleccione Ningún para excluír o texto da corrección e guionización. Seleccione Restabelecer o idioma predeterminado para reaplicar o idioma predeterminado na selección ou no parágrafo. Escolla Máis para abrir uma caixa de diálogo con máis opcións.
14 .uno%3AInsertFormula 4e A barra de fórmulas permite crear e inserir cálculos en documentos de texto.
11 HID_FRAME_TOOLBOX 71 Cando un marco está seleccionado, a barra Marco fornece as funcións máis importantes para formatalo e situalo.
f HID_OLE_TOOLBOX 9a A barra Obxecto OLE aparece cando os obxectos están seleccionados. Contén as funcións máis importantes para o formatado e posicionamento dos obxectos.
15 HID_DRAW_TEXT_TOOLBOX 46 Contén ordes de formatado para textos contidos en obxectos de debuxo.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_ROW 30 Alterna a fila actual coa adxacente por debaixo.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_COL 30 Alterna a fila actual coa adxacente por debaixo.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_COL 49 Elimina a columna actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a columna da etiqueta.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_ROW 43 Elimina a fila actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a fila da etiqueta.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 29 Introducir nomes para as series de datos.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_TEXT_COL 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_COL 26 Insire unha columna despois da actual.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_ROW 23 Insire unha fila debaixo da actual.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 4f Abre a caixa de diálogo Táboa de datos onde pode editar os datos da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle 6d Prema en Activar/Desativar título do eixo na barra Formatado para mostrar ou ocultar as etiquetas dos eixos.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle 68 Prema en Activar/Desactivar título na barra Formatado para mostrar ou ocultar o título e o subtítulo.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 38 Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_LEGEND_POS%3ALB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 2d Coloca a lenda na parte inferior da gráfica.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2c Coloca a lenda na parte dereita da gráfica.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2d Coloca a lenda na parte esquerda da gráfica.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend 56 Para mostrar ou ocultar a lenda, prema en Activar/Desactivar lenda na barra Formatado.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Coloca a lenda na parte superior da gráfica.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 89 Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_EDIT 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_KNOB 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
1c CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SEPARATOR 46 Escolle o separador entre varias cadeas de texto para o mesmo obxecto.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SYMBOL 42 Mostra as iconas de lenda xunto a cada etiqueta de punto de datos.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 39 Abre un diálogo para escoller o formato das porcentaxes.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PLACEMENT 47 Escolle a colocación das etiquetas de datos en relación aos obxectos.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PERCENT 38 Mostra a porcentaxe dos puntos de datos en cada columna.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_NUMBERFORMAT 36 Abre un diálogo para seleccionar o formato numérico.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_VALUE 30 Mostra os valores absolutos dos puntos de datos.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_NUMBER 30 Mostra os valores absolutos dos puntos de datos.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_TEXT 2f Mostra as etiquetas de texto do punto de datos.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 47 Opens the Data Labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryY 28 Mostra un eixo Y secundario na gráfica.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryY 34 Mostra o eixo Y en forma de liña con subdivisións.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryX 30 Displays the X axis as a line with subdivisions.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FsecondaryX 28 Mostra un eixo X secundario na gráfica.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FprimaryZ 34 Mostra o eixo Z en forma de liña con subdivisións.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertaxisdlg%2FInsertAxisDialog 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CT_INDICATE 1e Specifies the error indicator.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SAME_FOR_BOTH be Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positve (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NO_ERROR 1d Does not show any error bars.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT_VALUE 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR_VALUE 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_VALUE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION_LB 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE 7c Enter the address range from where to get the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SIGMA 52 Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance).
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER 9f Click a button to shrink the dialog, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialog to full size.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_VALUE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_VARIANT 60 Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 40 Use the Y Error Bars dialog to display error bars for 2D charts.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_MINUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_CONSTERROR 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PLUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 8c Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowCorrelationCoefficient 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FshowEquation 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flogarithmic 16 Definir a resolución.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Flinear 16 Definir a resolución.
2c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fpower 16 Definir a resolución.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2Fexponential 16 Definir a resolución.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Trendline%2FTP_TRENDLINE 46 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite crear e editar hiperligazóns.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 46 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite crear e editar hiperligazóns.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_CONTINUE_LINE 75 For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbor values will be shown. This is the default for chart type XY.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ACB_CLOCKWISE ab The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counterclockwise. Enable the Clockwise direction checkbox to draw the pieces in opposite direction.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STARTING_ANGLE_DIAL 151 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or donut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
36 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_CONNECTOR a3 Nas gráficas de columnas "amontoadas" e "porcentuais" (barra vertical), marque esta caixa de verificación para conectar as capas de columna asociadas ás liñas.
3b chart2%3ANumericField%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ANF_STARTING_ANGLE 70 Enter the starting angle between 0 and 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_OVERLAP 40 Define a configuración necesaria para sobrepor series de datos.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FMT_GAP 37 Define, en porcentaxe, o espazamento entre as columnas.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_2 9d Modifica a escala do eixo Y. Este eixo só é visíbel se ten polo menos unha serie de datos atribuída e se o modo de visualización do eixo está activado.
41 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 51 Check to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FCB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FRBT_OPT_AXIS_1 6a Esta opción está activada como predefinida.Todas as series de datos están aliñadas no eixo Y primario.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_SeriesToAxis%2FTP_OPTIONS 6a Esta opción está activada como predefinida.Todas as series de datos están aliñadas no eixo Y primario.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryX 48 Agrega liñas de grade que dividen o eixo X en seccións máis pequenas.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryY 48 Engade liñas de grade que dividen o eixo Y en seccións máis pequenas.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryZ 2d Engade liñas de grade ao eixo Z da gráfica.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical dd A icona Activar/Desactivar Grade vertical da barra de ferramentas Formatación alterna a visualización da grade para o eixo Y. Nota: Só funciona se a grade secundariado eixo X non está seleccionada en Inserir - Grades.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryY 2d Engade liñas de grade ao eixo Y da gráfica.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal e4 A icona Activar/Desactivar grade horizontal da barra Formatación alterna a visualización da grade mostrando o eixo X. Nota: Só funciona se se limpan as caixas de verificación de Grade secundaria situadas en Inserir - Grades.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FsecondaryZ 48 Engade liñas de grade que dividen o eixo Z en seccións máis pequenas.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FprimaryX 2d Agrega liñas de grade ao eixo X da gráfica.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Finsertgriddlg%2FInsertGridDialog ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ad You can divide the axes into sections by assigning gridlines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryYTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryXTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
f .uno%3ASubTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AZTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AXTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
10 .uno%3AMainTitle 30 Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado.
d .uno%3AYTitle 5e Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado ou as propiedades de todos os títulos xuntos.
10 .uno%3AAllTitles 5e Modifica as propiedades do título seleccionado ou as propiedades de todos os títulos xuntos.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fauto 2c Dispón automaticamente os números no eixo.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Feven 4f Dispón os números nos eixos, cos números impares debaixo dos números pares.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FbreakCB 1d Permite unha quebra de texto.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FOrientDegree 36 Permite inserir manualmente o ángulo de orientación.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FOrientDegree 36 Permite inserir manualmente o ángulo de orientación.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FoverlapCB 40 Especifica que o texto das celas pode sobreporse a outras celas.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FstackedCB 42 Atribúe unha orientación de texto vertical aos contidos da cela.
38 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FstackedCB 42 Atribúe unha orientación de texto vertical aos contidos da cela.
33 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FshowlabelsCB 42 Especifica se as etiquetas dos eixos deben mostrarse ou ocultarse.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FtextdirLB 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Fodd 4d Dispón os números no eixo, cos números pares debaixo dos números impares.
2b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2Ftile 33 Coloca os números no eixo, uns ao lado dos outros.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 7f A icona Activar/desactivar título do eixo da barra de ferramentas Formatado activa e desactiva a etiquetaxe de todos os eixos.
37 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_axisLabel%2FAxisLabelTabPage 42 Especifica se as etiquetas dos eixos deben mostrarse ou ocultarse.
43 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftitlerotationtabpage%2FTitleRotationTabPage 42 Especifica se as etiquetas dos eixos deben mostrarse ou ocultarse.
d .uno%3ALegend 41 Define os atributos de bordo, de área e de carácter das lendas.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB ab Abre unha caixa de diálogo na cal é posíbel editar as propiedades do  eixo Y secundario. Para inserir un eixo Y secundario, escolla Inserir - Eixos e seleccione Eixo Y.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA aa Abre unha caixa de diálogo na cal é posíbel editar as propiedades do eixo X secundario. Para inserir un eixo X secundario, escolla Inserir - Eixos e seleccione Eixo X.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 47 Opens a dialog, where you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 3c Opens the Y Axis dialog, to change properties of the Y axis.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_TIME_RESOLUTION 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_TIME_RESOLUTION 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
2e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_REVERSE 81 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unchecked state is the mathematical direction.
32 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_STEP_HELP 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
35 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_STEP_MAIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_MIN 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2f modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FCBX_AUTO_MAX 4b You must first deselect the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
34 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FLB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
2d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
30 modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Ftp_Scale%2FEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
35 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
3f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_OUTER 5c Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo .
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_INNER 5b Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte interior do eixo.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_INNER 5b Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte interior do eixo.
39 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_OUTER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo.
42 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_OUTER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_INNER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_INNER 43 Especifica que as marcas deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_OUTER 5c Especifica que as marcas de intervalo secundario deben colocarse na parte exterior do eixo .
36 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
30 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
2f CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
3c CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 CHART2_COMBOBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
4a chart2%3AComboBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZHelp 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYHelp 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXHelp 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZMain 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYMain 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXMain 4b Abre a caixa de diálogo Grade para a definición das propiedades de grade.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall b1 Abre a caixa de diálogo Paredes da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades o fondo da gráfica. Trátase do fondo "vertical" situado detrás da área de datos da gráfica.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor bb Abre a caixa de diálogo Base da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades da base da gráfica. É a parte inferior das gráficas 3D. Esta función só é válida para as gráficas 3D.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea ae Abre a caixa de diálogo Área da gráfica, onde pode modificar as propiedades da área da gráfica. A área da gráfica é o fondo situado detrás dos elementos da gráfica.
3e modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FPolynomialsSpinButton 16 Definir a resolución.
3d modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FResolutionSpinbutton 16 Definir a resolución.
3b modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSplineTypeComboBox 19 Apply a line curve model.
3a modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsmoothlinesdlg%2FSmoothLinesDialog 19 Apply a line curve model.
3c modules%2Fschart%2Fui%2Fsteppedlinesdlg%2FSteppedLinesDialog 3d Start with horizontal line and step up vertically at the end.
42 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 37 Seleccione unha cor utilizando a caixa de diálogo Cor.
46 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 37 Seleccione unha cor utilizando a caixa de diálogo Cor.
3b chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_LIGHTSOURCE 35 Seleccione unha cor para a fonte de luz seleccionada.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixo y. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 4c Prema para alternar entre o modelo de iluminación dunha esfera ou dun cubo.
3a chart2%3ACheckbox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_ROUNDEDEDGE 24 Os bordos están arredondados ao 5%.
40 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3a chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_OBJECTLINES 4d Mostra bordos arredor das áreas configurando o estilo de liña como Sólido.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ALB_SCHEME 60 Seleccione un esquema da caixa de lista ou prema calquera das seguintes caixas de verificación.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
39 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixo x. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 39 Prema para activar ou desactivar a fonte de luz uniforme.
d .uno%3AView3D c6 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para editar as propiedades dunha vista tridimensional das gráficas de columnas, barras, pizza, e de área. Para gráficas de liña e XY (Dispersión) pode ver liñas 3D.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 5e Define a rotación da gráfica no eixo z. A previsualización responde á nova configuración.
3f chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 101 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in X and Y direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3D charts. Pie and Donut charts do not support right-angled axes.
3c chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 2b Seleccione unha cor para a luz de ambiente.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_SHADING 5c Aplica o sombreamento Gouraud se está marcado ou o sombreamento plano se non está marcado.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_Y 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_X 71 Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZGRID 6e Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo z. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para as gráficas tridimensionais.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Posiciona a lenda na parte inferior da gráfica.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 30 Posiciona a lenda na parte superior da gráfica.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_SHOW 1e Mostra unha lenda na gráfica.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2a Posiciona a lenda á esquerda da gráfica.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Z 6e Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo z. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para as gráficas tridimensionais.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Y 32 Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo y (vertical).
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 29 Posiciona a lenda á dereita da gráfica.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_X 34 Introducir unha etiqueta para o eixo x (horizontal).
18 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SUB 29 Introducir un subtítulo para a gráfica.
19 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_MAIN 26 Introducir un título para a gráfica.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Tipo de gráfica.
34 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_XVALUE_SORTING 73 Conecta puntos por valores X ascendentes, mesmo se a orde dos valores é diferente, nun diagrama de dispersión XY.
35 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3APB_SPLINE_DIALOG 33 Opens a dialog to set the line or curve properties.
2d chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_LINETYPE 20 Choose the type of line to draw.
38 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y_PERCENT 36 As series amontoadas mostran valores como porcentaxes.
30 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y 3e As series amontoadas mostran os valores uns enriba dos outros.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_STACKED 31 Mostra series amontoadas para gráficas de liña.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LB_BAR_GEOMETRY 1f Selecciona unha forma da lista.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_3D_LOOK 32 Activa unha aparencia 3D para os valores de datos.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_VARIANT 32 Seleccione un subtipo do tipo de gráfica básico.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_NUM_OF_LINES 49 Definir o número de liñas para o tipo de gráfica de Columnas e liñas.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_TYPE 27 Seleccione un tipo de gráfica básico.
2e chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_3D_SCHEME 22 Seleccione o tipo de aparencia 3D.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
3e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 151 Para series de datos en columnas: A primeira columna do intervalo utilízase como nomes para series de datos. Para serie de datos en filas: A primeira columna utilízase como categorías. As columnas restantes abranguen as columnas de datos. Se esta caixa de verificación non está seleccionada, todas as columnas son columnas de datos.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 14c Para series de datos en columnas: A primeira fila do intervalo utilízase como nomes para series de datos. Para series de datos en filas: A primeira fila no intervalo utilízase como categorías. As filas restantes abranguen a serie de datos. Se esta caixa de verificación non está seleccionada, todas as filas son serie de datos.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATAROWS f7 A serie de datos toma datos das filas consecutivas no intervalo seleccionado. Para gráficas de dispersión, a primeira serie de datos conterá valores x en todas as series. As demais series de datos utilízanse como valores y, un para cada serie.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATACOLS 100 A serie de datos toma datos das columnas consecutivas no intervalo seleccionado. Para gráficas de dispersión, a primeira columna de datos conterá valores x para todas as seires. As demais columnas de datos utilízanse como valores y, un para cada serie.
31 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AIB_RANGE c5 Introduza o intervalo de datos que desexa incluír na gráfica. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo mentres selecciona o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AED_RANGE c5 Introduza o intervalo de datos que desexa incluír na gráfica. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo mentres selecciona o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 5b Abre a caixa de diálogo Intervalos de datos onde pode editar Intervalos e Series de datos.
2d chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_UP 42 Move cara a arriba a entrada seleccionada na lista Serie de datos.
31 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_REMOVE 37 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista Serie de datos.
2f chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_DOWN 42 Move cara a abaixo a entrada seleccionada na lista Serie de datos.
2e chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_ADD 9d Engade unha entrada debaixo da seleccionada na lista Serie de datos. Se hai unha entrada seleccionada, a nova serie de datos obtén o mesmo tipo de gráfica.
35 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_CAT 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_CATEGORIES 144 Shows the source range address of the categories (the texts you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an XY-chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimize this dialog while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
36 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_MAIN 123 Mostra o intervalo de orixe desde a segunda columna da caixa de lista Intervalo de datos. Pode modificar o intervalo na caixa de texto ou arrastrar no documento. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo ao seleccionar o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_RANGE 123 Mostra o intervalo de orixe desde a segunda columna da caixa de lista Intervalo de datos. Pode modificar o intervalo na caixa de texto ou arrastrar no documento. Para minimizar esta caixa de diálogo ao seleccionar o intervalo de datos en Calc, prema no botón Seleccionar intervalo de datos
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_RANGES_LIST c4 Mostra todos os intervalos de datos utilizados pola serie de datos seleccionada na caixa de lista Serie de datos. Cada intervalo de datos mostra o nome do papel e o enderezo do intervalo de orixe.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_SERIES_LIST ce Mostra unha lista de todas as series de datos na gráfica. Prema nunha entrada para ver e editar esas series de datos. Prema en Engadir para inserir na lista unha nova serie despois da entrada seleccionada.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 2e Modifica a disposición dos datos da gráfica.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 2e Modifica a disposición dos datos da gráfica.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 38 Redimensiona o texto ao modificar o tamaño da gráfica.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement c3 Move todos os elementos para a súa posición predefinida dentro da gráfica actual. Esta función non altera o tipo de gráfica nin ningún dos outros atributos alén da posición dos elementos.
12 .uno%3AContextType 29 Mostra o nome do tipo de gráfica actual.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 41 Restabelece o punto de datos seleccionado ao formato predefinido.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 1c Elimina as barras de erro Y.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 27 Elimina a etiqueta de datos selecciona.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 14 Elimina o valor R².
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 2a Elimina a ecuación de liña de tendencia.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 14 Borra a grade menor.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 3c Restabelece todos os puntos de datos ao formato predefinido.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Borra o eixo seleccionado.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 22 Borra todas as etiquetas de datos.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 1a Borra a lenda da gráfica.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 30 Abre un diálogo para inserir ou eliminar eixos.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 1c Formata a área da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 1c Insire unha grade principal.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 31 Abre un diálogo para inserir un título de eixo.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 1a Insire etiquetas de datos.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 33 Abre un diálogo para inserir títulos de gráfica.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 1d Insire unha grade secundaria.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 21 Formata a ecuación de tendencia.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1f Formata a liña de valor medio.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 26 Abre un diálogo para inserir un eixo.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 123 Crea unha gráfica no documento actual. Para usar un intervalo regular de celas como orixe de datos para a gráfica, prema dentro do intervalo de celas e logo escolla esta orde. Alternativamente, seleccione algunhas celas e escolla esta orde para crear unha gráfica das celas seleccionadas.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 1d Formata a liña de tendencia.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 33 Formata os indicadores de ganancia de cotizacións.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 32 Insire valor de coeficiente de determinación R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 1b Formata a grade secundaria.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 26 Formata o punto de datos seleccionado.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 22 Insire unha soa etiqueta de datos.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 52 Insire unha ecuación de liña de tendencia e o coeficiente de determinación R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 1a Formata a grade principal.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1f Formata o título seleccionado.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1c Formata o eixo seleccionado.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 19 Formata a serie de datos.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 1c Formata as barras de erro Y.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 1d Formata a planta da gráfica.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1f Elimina a liña de valor medio.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 18 Borra a grade principal.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 1c Formata a lenda da gráfica.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 30 Formata os indicadores de perda de cotizacións.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 1d Formata a parede da gráfica.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 1e Formata as etiquetas de datos.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 29 Formata a etiqueta de datos seleccionada.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector dd Seleccionar o elemento da gráfica que quere formatar. O elemento queda seleccionado na previsualización da gráfica. Prema sobre Formatado de selección para abrir o diálogo de propiedades para o elemento seleccionado.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 49 Restabelece na caixa de diálogo os valores de instalación predefinidos.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN c2 Desfai as alteracións realizadas no separador, restabelecendo a configuración existente antes de abrir a caixa de diálogo. Non se solicitará confirmación cando se peche a caixa de diálogo.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 33 Mostra unha previsualización da selección actual.
38 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Frbcopyarea 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fadvancedfilterdialog%2Frbfilterarea 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fassign 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatrow 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdestarea 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV 5e Observe a selección realizada na caixa de diálogo anterior. Non se alterou a configuración.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fvarbutton 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2d modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fcatalogdialog%2Finsert 4e Aplica os valores modificados ou seleccionados sen pechar a caixa de diálogo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdelabbrev 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fmanagenamesdialog%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1a ui%2Fgradientpage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdeldouble 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
23 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
28 modules%2Fsdraw%2Fui%2Fcopydlg%2Fdefault 49 Restabelece na caixa de diálogo os valores de instalación predefinidos.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fconsolidatedialog%2Frbdataarea 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fnamerangesdialog%2Frbassign 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD 49 Restabelece na caixa de diálogo os valores de instalación predefinidos.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 26 Aplica os cambios e pecha o asistente.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbprintarea 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
33 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fcustomslideshows%2Fdelete 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fassignrb 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fprintareasdialog%2Frbrepeatcol 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
39 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fdefinedatabaserangedialog%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DEL 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
23 hid%2Fcui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdelete 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 35 Restabelece os valores predefinidos de $[officename].
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fgoalseekdlg%2Fformulabutton 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE 116 Prema na icona Reducirpara reducir a caixa de diálogo ao tamaño do campo de entrada, para que sexa máis fácil marcar a referencia desexada na folla. As iconas converteranse automaticamente na icona Maximizar. Prema na caixa de diálogo para restaurar o seu tamaño orixinal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT a6 Prema o botón Seguinte  e o asistente emprega a configuración actual do diálogo e continúa co paso seguinte. No derradeiro paso, este botón convértese en Crear.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Elimina os elementos seleccionados despois da confirmación.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 52 Premendo en Cancelar péchase a caixa de diálogo sen gardar ningunha alteración.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 40 Actualiza a visualización da xanela ou do obxecto seleccionado.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY b3 Elimina a selección actual. Se hai varios obxectos seleccionados, elimínanse todos. A maioría das veces, aparece unha solicitude de confirmación antes de eliminar os obxectos.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 30 Habilita un obxecto seleccionado para renomealo.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 45 Use a orde Abrir para abrir o obxecto seleccionado nunha nova tarefa.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copia no portapapeis o elemento seleccionado.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 27 Insire a imaxe seleccionada como fondo.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 3c Insire no documento o elemento que moveu para o portapapeis.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 4d $[officename] carga e garda os ficheiros no formato OpenDocument por defecto.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 58 Activa a visualización dunha descrición breve de menús e iconas no apuntador do rato.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 5d Activa a visualización dos nomes de iconas no apuntador do rato e noutros contidos da Axuda.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor1rb 1d Formata a planta da gráfica.
26 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompresslzw 31 Lista as páxinas principais usadas recentemente.
2e svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionmf-nospin 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel1rb 89 Neste nivel non se dispón de compresión. Seleccione a opción Nivel 1 se a súa impresora PostScript non ofrece os recursos do nivel 2.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Finterlacedcb 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fepsipreviewcb 6c Especifica se se exporta unha previsualización monocromática en formato EPSI xunto co ficheiro PostScript.
28 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftiffpreviewcb 5d Especifica se se exporta unha previsualización no formato TIFF xunto co ficheiro PostScript.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressnone 41 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para definir as propiedades da curva.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionpngnf 84 Estabelece a compresión da exportación. Unha compresión alta significa unha imaxe máis pequena mais que leva máis tempo cargar.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fbinarycb 2a Seleccione un formato para mostrar a data.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolordepthlb 35 Seleccione unha cor para a fonte de luz seleccionada.
20 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Frlecb 24 Aliña o contido da cela á dereita.
2b svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcompressionjpgnf 92 Estabelece a calidade da exportación. Escolla entre calidade baixa cun tamaño de ficheiro mínimo e calidade alta con tamaño de ficheiro grande
2d svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fsavetransparencycb b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
22 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthlb 18 Borra a grade principal.
21 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Ftextcb 29 Posiciona a lenda á dereita da gráfica.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fcolor2rb 1f Formata a liña de valor medio.
23 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Flevel2rb 8a Seleccione a opción Nivel 2 se o seu dispositivo de saída ofrece soporte a mapas de bits a cores, imaxes da paleta e imaxes comprimidas.
27 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fresolutionlb 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
2a svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fheightmf-nospin 1a Borra a lenda da gráfica.
29 svt%2Fui%2Fgraphicexport%2Fwidthmf-nospin 1a Borra o eixo seleccionado.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 41 Select the character set from the options used for import/export.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 34 Exporta todos os campos de datos cunha largura fixa.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 52 Escolla ou introduza o delimitador de texto, que inclúe todos os campos de datos.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 48 Escolla ou introduza o delimitador de campo, que separa campos de datos.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bc Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 4c Especifica o conxunto de caracteres utilizados para a exportación de texto.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftextdelimiter 5c Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Finputother 8f Separa datos en columnas, empregando o separador personalizado especificado. Nota: O separador personalizado tamén debe facer parte dos datos.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fother 8f Separa datos en columnas, empregando o separador personalizado especificado. Nota: O separador personalizado tamén debe facer parte dos datos.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fspace 34 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por espazos.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcolumntype 77 Escolla unha columna na xanela de visualización e seleccione o tipo de datos a que desexa aplicar os datos importados.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcomma 32 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por comas.
3b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fdetectspecialnumbers 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fsemicolon 39 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por punto e coma.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fmergedelimiters 47 Combina delimitadores consecutivos e elimina campos de datos en branco.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftab 38 Separa en columnas os datos delimitados por tabuladores.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftoseparatedby 2b Seleccione o separador utilizado nos datos.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ftofixedwidth 4a Separa en columnas os datos de largura fixa (igual número de caracteres).
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Ffromrow 36 Especifica a liña onde desexa iniciar a importación.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Flanguage 43 Determina a configuración da impresora para as follas de cálculo.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2Fcharset b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftextimportcsv%2FTextImportCsvDialog 3b Configura as opcións de importación de datos delimitados.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT 72 Specifies that anything extending beyond the maximum print range will be cut off and not included in the printing.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 64 The Warning Print Options dialog appears when the page setup does not match the defined print range.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flf 45 Aplica unha "quebra de liña con sangría" como quebra de parágrafo.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcr 37 Aplica un "retorno de carro" como quebra de parágrafo.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcrlf 62 Aplica un "retorno de carro" e unha "quebra de liña con sangría". Esta é a opción predefinida.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Flanguage 76 Especifica o idioma do texto, se aínda non foi definido. Esta configuración só está dispoñíbel cando se importa.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Ffont bc Configurando un tipo de letra predefinido está a especificar que o texto debe mostrarse nun tipo de letra específico. Os tipos de letra predefinidos só se poden seleccionar ao importar.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2Fcharset 59 Especifica o conxunto de caracteres do ficheiro para a súa exportación ou importación.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fasciifilterdialog%2FAsciiFilterDialog 59 Especifica o conxunto de caracteres do ficheiro para a súa exportación ou importación.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 38 Elimina o gráfico selecionado despois da confirmación.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 3a Atribúe un título a un obxecto seleccionado da Galería.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 39 A orde Previsualización  mostra o gráfico seleccionado.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 32 Insire o gráfico seleccionado como unha ligazón.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 55 Insire unha copia do obxecto gráfico seleccionado, directamente dentro do documento.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 41 Define como é inserido un obxecto gráfico dentro dun documento.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 29 Permite gardar o fondo dunha páxina web.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 23 Desactiva as extensións inseridas.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 3e Define todos os gráficos para seren invisíbeis no documento.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 5e Se desactivou a visualización de imaxes, escolla a ordeCargar imaxes para as facer visíbeis.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2d Copia unha imaxe seleccionada no portapapeis.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 42 Copia no portapapeis a ligazón situada baixo o apuntador do rato.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 47 Abre unha caixa de diálogo en que se pode gardar a imaxe seleccionada.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 16 Mostra o nome do tema.
b slot%3A5500 55 Crea un documento novo empregando un modelo existente ou abre un documento de mostra.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 93 Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 34 Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 b0 Abre o diálogo Etiquetas, no se que se poden estabelecer as opcións para as etiquetas, e a seguir crea un documento de texto novo para as etiquetas (Writer do $[officename]).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 16 Definir a resolución.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 16 Definir a resolución.
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 4c Abre o Asistente de Bases de Datos para crear un ficheiro de bases de datos.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 39 Crea un documento de debuxo novo (Draw do $[officename]).
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 16 Definir a resolución.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 83 Crea un documento de presentación novo (Impress do $[officename]). Cando se activa aparece o diálogo Asistente de Presentacións.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 38 Crea un novo documento de folla (Calc do $[officename]).
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 3a Crea un novo documento de texto (Writer do $[officename]).
d .uno%3ANewDoc 49 Se desexa crear un documento a partir dun modelo, escolla Novo - Modelos.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 4c Abre o Asistente de Bases de Datos para crear un ficheiro de bases de datos.
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 5e Crea un novo documento de $[officename]. Prema na frecha para seleccionar o tipo de documento.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 28 Crea un novo documento de $[officename].
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 27 Abre o modelo seleccionado para editar.
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 42 Engade, retira ou redistribúe os modelos ou documentos de mostra.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 3b Mostra as propiedades do modelo ou documento seleccionados.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 3a Permite previsualizar o modelo ou documento seleccionados.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 2d Sobe un nivel de cartafoles, de ser posíbel.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 2a Recúa até a xanela anterior do diálogo.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW d9 Lista os modelos ou documentos dispoñíbeis na categoría seleccionada. Seleccione un modelo ou documento e, a seguir, prema en Abrir. Para ver o documento, prema o botón Visualizar que hai sobre a caixa da dereita.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 2c Imprime o modelo ou documento seleccionados.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL bb As categorías aparecen na caixa da parte esquerda do diálogo Modelos e documentos. Prema nunha categoría para que se mostren os ficheiros asociados con esa categoría na caixa Título.
29 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2Fok 23 Crea un documento novo para editar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeldialog%2FLabelDialog 43 Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 43 Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftype 103 Escolla o formato de tamaño que desexe empregar. Os formatos dispoñíbeis dependen da marca seleccionada na lista Marca. Se desexa empregar un formato de etiqueta personalizado, seleccione [Usuario] e a seguir prema na lapela Formato para definir o formato.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fbrand 2d Escolla a marca de papel que desexe empregar.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Finsert 9a Seleccione o campo da base de datos que desexe e a seguir prema na frecha que hai á esquerda desta caixa para inserir o campo na caixa Texto de etiqueta.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ffield 9a Seleccione o campo da base de datos que desexe e a seguir prema na frecha que hai á esquerda desta caixa para inserir o campo na caixa Texto de etiqueta.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fcontinuous 28 Imprime etiquetas en follas individuais.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Fdatabase 50 Seleccione a base de datos que desexe empregar como orixe dos datos da etiqueta.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftable 60 Seleccione a táboa da base de datos que conteña o(s) campo(s) que desexe empregar na etiqueta.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Faddress 6d Crea unha etiqueta co seu enderezo de remitente. O texto que haxa na caixa Texto da etiqueta é substituído.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2Ftextview 67 Introduza o texto que desexe que apareza na etiqueta. Tamén pode inserir un campo dunha base de datos.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardmediumpage%2FCardMediumPage 3d Indique o texto da etiqueta e escolla o seu tamaño de papel.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Ftype 2c Introduza ou seleccione un tipo de etiqueta.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2Fbrand 2b Introduza ou seleccione a marca que desexe.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fsavelabeldialog%2FSaveLabelDialog 2b Introduza ou seleccione a marca que desexe.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fsave 38 Garda o formato da etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita actual.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Frows 65 Introduza o número de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita que desexen que ocupen a altura da páxina.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Ftop b1 Mostra a altura desde o bordo superior da páxina ao bordo superior da primeira etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fleft b1 Mostra a altura desde o bordo esquerdo da páxina ao bordo esquerdo da primeira etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fwidth 78 Mostra a largura da etiqueta ou da tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fvert dd Mostra a distancia entre o bordo superior dunha etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita e o bordo superior da etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita inmediatamente inferior. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fcols 64 Introduza o número de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita que desexen que ocupen o largo da páxina.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fheight 77 Mostra a altura da etiqueta ou da tarxeta de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2Fhori 9e Mostra a distancia entre os bordos esquerdos de etiquetas adxacentes en tarxetas de visita. Se vai definir un formato personalizado, introduza aquí un valor.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabelformatpage%2FLabelFormatPage 1d Set paper formatting options.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsynchronize b2 Permite editar unha única etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita e actualiza o contido das etiquetas ou tarxetas de visita restantes na páxina ao premer no botón Sincronizar etiquetas.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fcols 5f Introduza o número de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita que desexa ter nunha fila da páxina.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsinglelabel 40 Imprime unha única etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita nunha páxina.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC 7b Copia o contido da etiqueta ou tarxeta de visita superior esquerda no resto das etiquetas ou tarxetas de visita da páxina.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fentirepage 40 Crea unha páxina enteira de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Fsetup 2c Abre o diálogo Configuración de impresora.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2Frows 54 Introduza o número de etiquetas ou de tarxetas de visita que desexa ter na páxina.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Flabeloptionspage%2FLabelOptionsPage 6f Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronization and printer settings.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 33 Deseñe e cree as súas propias tarxetas de visita.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE fe Escolla o formato de tamaño que desexe empregar. Os formatos dispoñíbeis dependen do que seleccione na lista Marca. Se desexa empregar un formato de tamaño personalizado, seleccione [Usuario] e a seguir prema na lapela Formato para definir o formato.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 2d Escolla a marca de papel que desexe empregar.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 31 Imprime tarxetas de visita en follas individuais.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 2d Imprime tarxetas de visita en papel continuo.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Fautotext 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2Ftreeview 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcardformatpage%2FCardFormatPage 2d Define the appearance of your business cards.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fphone 25 Introduza o seu teléfono particular.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fjob 2f Introduza o nome descritivo da súa profesión.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fmobile 22 Introduza o seu número de móbil.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fcountry 26 Introduza o nome do país no que vive.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname2 4d Introduza as iniciais da persoa a quen desexe empregar como segundo contacto.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Furl 35 Introduza o enderezo da súa páxina web na Internet.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname2 4d Introduza os apelidos da persoa a quen desexe empregar como segundo contacto.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname2 48 Introduza o nome da persoa a quen desexe empregar como segundo contacto.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Furl 40 Introduza o enderezo da páxina web na Internet da súa empresa.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fmobile 22 Introduza o seu número de móbil.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fphone 26 Introduza o teléfono da súa empresa.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 3d Introduza o nome do país no que está situado o seu negocio.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fslogan 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany2 2e Introduza detalles adicionais sobre a empresa.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2FBusinessDataPage 2e Introduza detalles adicionais sobre a empresa.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 27 Abre o ficheiro en modo só de lectura.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5b De haber varias versións do ficheiro seleccionado, seleccione a versión que desexe abrir.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 8a Introduza un nome de ficheiro ou unha ruta ao ficheiro. Tamén pode introducir un URL que comece co nome do protocolo, ftp, http ou https.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 35 Prema para eliminar todos os ficheiros seleccionados.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 5b Prema para cancelar a eliminación do ficheiro co nome que aparece nesta caixa de diálogo.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4a Insire o ficheiro seleccionado no documento actual na posición do cursor.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 8a Introduza un nome de ficheiro ou unha ruta ao ficheiro. Tamén pode introducir un URL que comece co nome do protocolo, ftp, http ou https.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 4b Prema para eliminar o ficheiro co nome que aparece nesta caixa de diálogo.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 6d Para lle mudar o nome a un ficheiro, prema no ficheiro co botón dereito do rato e a seguir escolla Renomear.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 8e Seleccione o tipo de ficheiro que desexe abrir ou seleccione Todos os ficheiros (*) para mostrar unha lista de todos os ficheiros do cartafol.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 63 Para eliminar un ficheiro, prema no ficheiro co botón dereito do rato e a seguir escolla Eliminar.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 16 Crea un cartafol novo.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 1c Abre ou importa un ficheiro.
b .uno%3AOpen 1c Abre ou importa un ficheiro.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 3d Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in.
49 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_PLACES_LISTBOX 49 Displays "favourite" places, i.e. shortcuts to local or remote locations.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 15 Creates a new folder.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 57 Move up one folder in the folder hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level folders.
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9a Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported.
50 fpicker%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_CONNECT_TO_SERVER 7f Opens a dialog where you can set up connection to various types of servers, including WebDAV, FTP, SSH, Windows Share and CMIS.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fcomments 3c Introduza comentarios para axudar a identificar o documento.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fkeywords c8 Introduza as palabras que desexe empregar para indexar o contido do documento. As palabras clave deben estar separadas por comas. Unha palabra clave pode conter caracteres de espazo ou puntos e comas.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Ftitle 26 Introduza un título para o documento.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2Fsubject 76 Introduza un asunto para o documento. Pode empregar un asunto para agrupar documentos que teñan contidos semellantes.
34 sfx%2Fui%2Fdescriptioninfopage%2FDescriptionInfoPage 32 Contén información descritiva sobre o documento.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fuserdatacb 86 Garda o nome completo do usuario co ficheiro. Pode editar o nome escollendo Ferramentas - Opcións - $[officename] - Datos de usuario.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Freset a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2Fnameed 1a Mostra o nome do ficheiro.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fdocumentinfopage%2FDocumentInfoPage 35 Contén información básica sobre o ficheiro actual.
20 sfx2%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fadd 37 Prema para engadir unha fila nova á lista Propiedades.
27 sfx2%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2Fproperties be Introduza o seu contido personalizado. Pode cambiar o nome, tipo e contido de cada fila. Pode engadir ou retirar filas. Os elementos expórtanse como metadatos a outros formatos de ficheiro.
2b sfx2%2Fui%2Fcustominfopage%2FCustomInfoPage 45 Permite asignarlle campos de información personalizada ao documento.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstatisticsinfopage%2FStatisticsInfoPage 28 Mostra estatísticas do ficheiro actual.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 28 Mostra estatísticas do ficheiro actual.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Fprotect d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Funprotect d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Frecordchanges 67 Seleccione para permitir que se rexistren os cambios. Isto é o mesmo que Editar - Cambios - Rexistrar.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2Freadonly 45 Seleccione para permitir que este documento se abra só para lectura.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityinfopage%2FSecurityInfoPage 2f Sets password options for the current document.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 56 Permite organizar e editar os modelos, así como gardar o ficheiro actual como modelo.
28 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fadmin 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
2c svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatatable 2c Seleccione a táboa de datos da súa axenda.
2d svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fdatasource 2b Seleccione a fonte de datos da súa axenda.
38 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2FAddressTemplateDialog 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
29 svt%2Fui%2Faddresstemplatedialog%2Fassign 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 5f Abre a caixa de diálogo Xestión de modelos, na que se poden organizar ou crear modelos novos.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 27 Abre o modelo seleccionado para editar.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 2d Lista as categorías de modelo dispoñíbeis.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 37 Seleccione unha categoría na que gardar o novo modelo.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 20 Introduza un nome para o modelo.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 25 Garda o documento actual como modelo.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 42 Abre un diálogo no que se pode seleccionar un modelo para editar.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 83 Especifica se os obxectos situados alén das marxes de impresión actual deben escalarse para que se axusten ao papel da impresora.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 1f Selecciona unha forma da lista.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 27 Seleccione un tipo de gráfica básico.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 14 Borra a grade menor.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 33 Aplica a páxina principal a todas as diapositivas.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 16 Definir a resolución.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 2b Seleccione unha cor para a luz de ambiente.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagerows 22 Seleccione o tipo de aparencia 3D.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 3c Lista as páxinas principais que están a usarse no momento.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit 26 Formata o punto de datos seleccionado.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 33 Aplica a páxina principal a todas as diapositivas.
27 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsingleprintjob 32 Aliña o contido da cela á esquerda e á dereita.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagespersheetbtn 29 Introducir nomes para as series de datos.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagecols 16 Definir a resolución.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsheetmarginsb 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 31 Lista as páxinas principais usadas recentemente.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forderlb 27 Seleccione un tipo de gráfica básico.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 6a Para imprimir folletos pode escoller unha orde de páxinas de esquerda a dereita ou de dereita a esquerda.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Freverseorder 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 16 Definir a resolución.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinters 12d A caixa de lista mostra as impresoras instaladas. Prema na impresora que desexe empregar para o traballo de impresión actual. Prema no botón de detalles da impresora para ver información sobre a impresora seleccionada. Prema no botón Propiedades para cambiar algunhas das propiedades da impresora.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fexpander 1f Formata o título seleccionado.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
1e vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fsetup 7d Abre a caixa de diálogo de propiedades da impresora. As propiedades da impresora varían segundo a impresora que seleccione.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 78 Abre o separador Transición de diapositivas, que permite aplicar efectos de transición ás diapositivas seleccionadas.
22 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcopycount 32 Introduza o número de copias que desexe imprimir.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2FPrintDialog 93 Imprime o documento ou selección actuais ou as páxinas que vostede indique. Tamén pode establecer as opcións de impresión do documento actual.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
26 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Forientationlb 2a Seleccione un formato para mostrar a data.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 3a Especifica se se imprimen as imaxes do documento de texto.
24 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fprinttofile 26 Formata o punto de datos seleccionado.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 29 Posiciona a lenda á dereita da gráfica.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 45 Especifica se se imprimen os campos de control do documento de texto.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 32 Activa unha aparencia 3D para os valores de datos.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 2b Seleccione unha cor para a luz de ambiente.
21 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fbordercb 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 24 Aliña o contido da cela á dereita.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 31 Lista as páxinas principais usadas recentemente.
29 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpaperspersheetlb 2a Seleccione un formato para mostrar a data.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 2a Posiciona a lenda á esquerda da gráfica.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 27 Seleccione un tipo de gráfica básico.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 1f Selecciona unha forma da lista.
25 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fpagemarginsb 32 Seleccione un subtipo do tipo de gráfica básico.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 24 Aliña o contido da cela á dereita.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 22 Definir a orde de puntos de datos.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 31 Lista as páxinas principais usadas recentemente.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 40 Especifica se desexa incluír o nome do documento na impresión.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 49 Elimina a columna actual. Non é posíbel eliminar a columna da etiqueta.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 59 Especifica se se debe incluír o contido da xanela Ordes na parte inferior da impresión.
20 vcl%2Fui%2Fprintdialog%2Fcollate 31 Manteña a orde das páxinas do documento actual.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 46 Especifica que non desexa modificar a escala das páxinas ao imprimir.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 41 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para definir as propiedades da curva.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 49 Imprime só a(s) zona(s) ou obxecto(s) seleccionados do documento actual.
c .uno%3APrint 93 Imprime o documento ou selección actuais ou as páxinas que vostede indique. Tamén pode establecer as opcións de impresión do documento actual.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 87 Lista as impresoras instaladas no sistema operativo. Para cambiar a impresora predeterminada, seleccione un nome de impresora da lista.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 89 Abre unha xanela nova no programa de correo predeterminado co documento actual como anexo. Emprégase o formato de ficheiro da Microsoft.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 89 Abre unha xanela nova no programa de correo predeterminado co documento actual como anexo. Emprégase o formato de ficheiro OpenDocument.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Envía unha copia do documento actual a diferentes aplicativos.
f .uno%3ASendMail 7e Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
b .uno%3AQuit 24 Detén a execución da macro actual.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 2b Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fdelete 1d Deletes the selected version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fshow 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fopen 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fversions 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Falways 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fcompare 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
36 sfx%2Fui%2Fversioncommentdialog%2FVersionCommentDialog 7d Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment.
22 sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2Fsave a8 Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version.
2e sfx%2Fui%2Fversionsofdialog%2FVersionsOfDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 51 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
1e cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Flist 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2Fsource 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpastespecial%2FPasteSpecialDialog 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fallsheets 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Frows 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2b svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcalcsearchin 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fexpander1 60 Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
26 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplace 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplaceall 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearch 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Flayout cf Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslikebtn 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsoundslike a2 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
27 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnoformat 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
30 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2FFindReplaceDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2d svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcharwidth 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 38 Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction.
25 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fregexp 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
23 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fcols 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fselection 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchall 32 Aliña o contido da cela á esquerda e á dereita.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fmatchcase 39 Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters.
24 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fnotes 48 In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches.
28 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fbackwards 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3a Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplacelist 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fwholewords 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchlist 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2a svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Freplaceterm 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsearchterm 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Frelaxbox 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Flongerfld 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fotherfld 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
2c svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilaritybtn 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2Fshorterfld 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fsimilaritysearchdialog%2FSimilaritySearchDialog 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
29 svx%2Fui%2Ffindreplacedialog%2Fsimilarity 89 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 90 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 29 Insire un índice no documento principal.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 29 Insire un índice no documento principal.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 29 Insire un índice no documento principal.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 b8 Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialog is opened.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 68 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 124 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a check mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a7 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you want to display.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 122 Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FdescTV 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Fnameentry 1b Enter a name for the image.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FframeCB a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Ftextentry 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2Furlentry 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcuiimapdlg%2FIMapDialog 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fcomment%2FCommentDialog 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
2b svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Fundo 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Facceptall 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Freject 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
2d svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Faccept 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2Fchanges b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
30 svx%2Fui%2Facceptrejectchangesdialog%2Frejectall 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fredlineviewpage%2FRedlineViewPage 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcommentedit 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Faction 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fcomment 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdotdotdot 3c Seleccione o intervalo de celas que desexa usar como filtro.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Factionlist 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frange 3c Seleccione o intervalo de celas que desexa usar como filtro.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Frangeedit 3c Seleccione o intervalo de celas que desexa usar como filtro.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthorlist 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
25 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fauthor 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
29 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstartclock 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fendtime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
26 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fenddate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
28 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fstarttime 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
27 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdatecond 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2FRedlineFilterPage 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 svx%2Fui%2Fredlinefilterpage%2Fdate 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 4b Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6a Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 17e Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 16 Definir a resolución.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 46 To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fbookmode 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fzoomsb 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fautomatic 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumns 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 3c Insire unha páxina a continuación da páxina seleccionada.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fvariable 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2F100pc 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitw 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Ffitwandh 3c Insire unha páxina a continuación da páxina seleccionada.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 3c Insire unha páxina a continuación da páxina seleccionada.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fsinglepage 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Fcolumnssb 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2Foptimal 3c Insire unha páxina a continuación da páxina seleccionada.
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fzoomdialog%2FZoomDialog 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 76 In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 145 Click the color that you want to use. To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8b Show or hides the Color Bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility db Escolla Ver - Barras de ferramentas - Restabelecer para restabelecer o comportamento sensíbel ao contexto das barras de ferramentas. Desta forma, xa será posíbel que se mostren automaticamente dependendo do contexto.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2a Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 16 Definir a resolución.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 16 Definir a resolución.
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 16 Definir a resolución.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 16 Definir a resolución.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 16 Definir a resolución.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 16 Definir a resolución.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 12 Inserts a comment.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 82 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fdelete 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Fsubsetlb 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2Ffontlb 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fspecialcharacters%2FSpecialCharactersDialog 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
32 cui%2Fui%2Finsertoleobject%2FInsertOLEObjectDialog 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
2c cui%2Fui%2Finsertplugin%2FInsertPluginDialog 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 5f Insire unha nova capa no documento. Só é posíbel utilizar esta orde en Draw, non en Impress.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6a Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-nocjk 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastsizelb 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestsizelb-cjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-nocjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feaststylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlsizelb-nocjk 9c Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fctlstylelb 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-nocjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fweststylelb-cjk 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Feastfontnamelb 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2Fwestfontnamelb-cjk 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcharnamepage%2FCharNamePage 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fpositionlb 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
2a cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Findividualwordscb 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinecolorlb 25 Select the color for the underlining.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinelb 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fshadowcb 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foutlinecb 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
21 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Frelieflb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
22 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Feffectslb e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
10 .uno%3AFontColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
c .uno%3AColor cf Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar.
23 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Femphasislb 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Fstrikeoutlb 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Ffontcolorlb 96 Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Funderlinelb 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2Foverlinecolorlb 24 Select the color for the overlining.
24 cui%2Fui%2Feffectspage%2FEffectsPage 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcommented 50 Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformated 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fthousands 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fnegnumred 38 Cambia a cor da letra dos números negativos a vermello.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fadd 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdecimalsed 3b Introduza o número de lugares decimais que desexe mostrar.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fdelete 23 Deletes the selected number format.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fleadzerosed 4c Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fsourceformat 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcategorylb 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Flanguagelb 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fformatlb 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
25 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fedit 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2Fcurrencylb 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingformatpage%2FNumberingFormatPage 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Funvisitedlb c1 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fvisitedlb bf Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftargetfrmlb 6c Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Feventpb 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furlpb 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Fnameed 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
2c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Furled 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2Ftexted 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcharurlpage%2FCharURLPage 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninglb b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fscalewidthsb 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fpairkerning 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Ffontsizesb 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fraiselowersb 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsubscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fnormal 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fkerninged 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fautomatic 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2Fsuperscript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpositionpage%2FPositionPage 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
24 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fendbracket 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Fstartbracket 85 Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
22 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2Ftwolines 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftwolinespage%2FTwoLinesPage 7f Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckApplySpacing 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckHangPunct 88 Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FcheckForbidList 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fasiantypography%2FAsianTypography f2 Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 4c Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcomboLB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_CONTEXTUALSPACING 94 Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
2d cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FcheckCB_AUTO 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_FLINEINDENT 12a Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position".
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FspinED_LINEDISTPERCENT 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparaindentspacing%2FParaIndentSpacing 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_DELALL 80 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FbuttonBTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3c cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FentryED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonST_RIGHTTAB_ASIAN 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
37 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonST_LEFTTAB_ASIAN 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
3a cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FradiobuttonBTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fparatabspage%2FParagraphTabsPage 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fdistancemf 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadows 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
1c cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fsync 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fbottommf 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Frightmf 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fleftmf 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinecolorlb 46 Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s).
1d cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Ftopmf 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Flinestylelb 6b Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fshadowcolorlb 1e Select a color for the shadow.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2Fpresets 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fborderpage%2FBorderPage 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 71 Click a color. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting color. Click Automatic to reset a font color.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Farearb 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fwindowpos 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftilerb 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fshowpreview 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftablelb 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fparalb 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Ftransparencymf 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fpositionrb 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Flink 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbackgroundcolorset 62 Click the color that you want to use as a background. To remove a background color, click No Fill.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fbrowse 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2Fselectlb 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fbackgroundpage%2FBackgroundPage 24 Set the background color or graphic.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fcolumnpage%2Ftextdirectionlb 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fformattablepage%2Ftextdirection 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcheckCB_EXPAND 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FcomboLB_LASTLINE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FradioBTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fparagalignpage%2FParaAlignPage 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fdesc 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fcategory 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnextstyle 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnamero a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fautoupdate b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Fnamerw a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2Flinkedwith 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Fmanagestylepage%2FManageStylePage 27 Set the options for the selected style.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckAdaptBox 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboLayoutFormat 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonHorz 33 Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckRegisterTrue 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboRegisterStyle dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargBot 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageLayout 60 Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargRight e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargLeft e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinMargTop 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboTextFlowBox 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcheckbuttonVert 31 Centers the cells vertically on the printed page.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonLandscape 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPaperTray ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinHeight 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FspinWidth 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FradiobuttonPortrait 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FcomboPageFormat 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpageformatpage%2FPageFormatPage 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonMore 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckAutofit 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinHeight 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargRight 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
2f svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckDynSpacing 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinMargLeft 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameFP 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FspinSpacing 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
2b svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckSameLR 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2a svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FbuttonEdit 27 Engadir ou editar o texto de cabeceira.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckFooterOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FcheckHeaderOn 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fheadfootformatpage%2FHFFormatPage 78 Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 25 Engadir ou editar o texto de rodapé.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4d Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
35 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED_FIRST 30 First and even/odd pages share the same content.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7b Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, where you can add text or graphics.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 40 Changes the selected western characters to lowercase characters.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 67 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 40 Changes the selected western characters to uppercase characters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 56 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an uppercase character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 88 Changes the case of characters in the selection. If the cursor is within a word and no text is selected, then the word is the selection.
2c svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstyles 60 Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text.
30 svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fpositionlb 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight3ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fstylelb 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight2ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft4ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight4ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft2ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2Fadjustlb 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
2e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FRight1ED 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft3ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2d svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FLeft1ED 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
3e svx%2Fui%2Fasianphoneticguidedialog%2FAsianPhoneticGuideDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 34 Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Centra verticalmente os obxectos seleccionados. Se só hai un obxecto seleccionado en Draw ou Impress, o centro do obxecto alíñase co centro vertical da páxina.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Centra verticalmente os obxectos seleccionados. Se só hai un obxecto seleccionado en Draw ou Impress, o centro do obxecto alíñase co centro vertical da páxina.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsplitcellsdialog%2FSplitCellsDialog 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Reescala o texto da gráfica cando lle cambie o tamaño da gráfica.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2Fstylename 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Fnewstyle%2FCreateStyleDialog 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fstringinput%2Fedit 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fobjectnamedialog%2FObjectNameDialog 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fdesc_entry e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
35 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2Fobject_title_entry 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fobjecttitledescdialog%2FObjectTitleDescDialog 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_CAP_STYLE 52 Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_EDGE_STYLE 91 Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
2a cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1c Select a color for the line.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
29 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FTSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLineTabPage 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead.
2c cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
21 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_COLOR 1c Select a color for the line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinetabpage%2FLB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fnamedialog%2FNameDialog d Enter a name.
2d cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FCBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
2e cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FNUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
2b cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FLB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
26 cui%2Fui%2Flinestyletabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
27 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
24 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
28 cui%2Fui%2Flineendstabpage%2FLineEndPage 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 57 Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FCB_HATCHBCKGRD 6d Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_SCALE fd Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FAreaTabPage 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_STEPCOUNT 5d Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FLB_AREA_TYPE 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FRBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FRBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_ORIGINAL 8d Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FNUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4a Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fareatabpage%2FTSB_STRETCH 5a Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box.
18 cui%2Fgrdientpage%2Fsave 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradientslb 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fload 23 Load a different list of gradients.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortolb 30 Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfrommtr 72 Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fbordermtr 9c Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fadd 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
25 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolorfromlb 37 Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fanglemtr 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterymtr c8 Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcenterxmtr cc Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fgradienttypelb 2b Select the gradient that you want to apply.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fmodify 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2Fcolortomtr 70 Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fgradientpage%2FGradientPage 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fmodify 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
1a cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fadd 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fload 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fhatchingslb 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fsave 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinecolorlb 24 Select the color of the hatch lines.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Flinetypelb 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglectl 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fanglemtr 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2Fdistancemtr 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fhatchpage%2FHatchPage 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FLB_BITMAPS 5b Select a bitmap in the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FLB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 32 Select a background color for your bitmap pattern.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FLB_COLOR 54 Select a foreground color, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fbitmaptabpage%2FBitmapTabPage 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1e Select a color for the shadow.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
35 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
37 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FLB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRANSPARENT 6e Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
31 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8c Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_OFF 1d Turns off color transparency.
32 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
33 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FRBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 74 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
34 cui%2Fui%2Ftransparencytabpage%2FTransparencyTabPage 50 Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FULL_WIDTH 3f Introduza a ruta ao cartafol que contén os ficheiros de texto.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FCTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
29 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_CONTOUR 54 Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
30 cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2f cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTextAttributesPage 66 Configura o deseño e as propiedades de ancoraxe de texto dun debuxo ou obxecto de texto seleccionado.
2e cui%2Fui%2Ftextattrtabpage%2FTSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 66 Configura o deseño e as propiedades de ancoraxe de texto dun debuxo ou obxecto de texto seleccionado.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FLB_ORIENT 0 
28 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_SIZERECT 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FTSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FLB_ANCHOR 0 
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FCTL_POSRECT f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fpossizetabpage%2FPositionAndSize 25 Resizes or moves the selected object.
26 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_ANGLE 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FCTL_RECT 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
2a cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
25 cui%2Fui%2Frotationtabpage%2FRotation 1c Rotates the selected object.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
34 cui%2Fui%2Fslantcornertabpage%2FSlantAndCornerRadius 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
e .uno%3AForward 5a Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 24 Ancora o elemento á páxina actual.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 27 Ancora o elemento ao parágrafo actual.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 27 Ancora o elemento ao marco circundante.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar ab Ancora o elemento seleccionado como un carácter. Se a altura do elemento é maior que o tamaño do tipo de letra, aumenta a altura da liña en que se encontra o elemento.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar ab Ancora o elemento seleccionado como un carácter. Se a altura do elemento é maior que o tamaño do tipo de letra, aumenta a altura da liña en que se encontra o elemento.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 23 Select a color for the text shadow.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centers the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
f .uno%3AFontWork 69 Edita os efectos Fontwork do obxecto seleccionado que se creou previamente na caixa de diálogo Fontwork.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
2b cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FNUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
28 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_ENDLESS 9a Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
2c cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
2d cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
23 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FBTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
25 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTSB_AUTO c5 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
26 cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FLB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
2a cui%2Fui%2Ftextanimtabpage%2FTextAnimation 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckShrinkFitCellSize aa Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckAsianMode 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckHyphActive 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Freferences 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinDegrees a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckVertStack 1d Aliña o texto verticalmente.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2Fdialcontrol 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxVertAlign 51 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FspinIndentFrom 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcomboboxHorzAlign 53 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FcheckWrapTextAuto 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fcellalignment%2FCellsAlignPage 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 41 Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 60 Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D).
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1c Renders a smooth 3D surface.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 23 Renders the 3D surface as polygons.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 80 Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 4f Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 67 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 67 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 45 Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 52 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 52 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object.
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 108 Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 35 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 135 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 3f Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 25 Select a color for the ambient light.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2c Select a color for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d0 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 33 Define the light source for the selected 3D object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 79 Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1e Converts the texture to color.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 135 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl (Mac: Shift+Command), and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2a Select the color to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 36 Select the color that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 59 Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 35 Select the color that you want the object to reflect.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 2f Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 74 Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 8a Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 7e Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 39 Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 6c Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 80 Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 91 Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 58 Enable Check grammar to work first on all spellcheck errors, then on all grammar errors.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
f .uno%3ASpelling 9a Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 40 Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands.
3c svx%2Fui%2Fchineseconversiondialog%2FChineseConversionDialog 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Flangcb 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
1b cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fleft 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
1d cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Fwordcb b6 Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Freplaceed af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2Falternatives c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
26 cui%2Fui%2Fthesaurus%2FThesaurusDialog 51 Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 47 Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 4f Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 af Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d3 Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 5d Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite gardar un novo cartafol no ficheiro de base de datos.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 71 Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 96 Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8d Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 74 Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a5 Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2Fedit 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fapplyautofmtpage%2FApplyAutoFmtPage 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
33 cui%2Fui%2Facoroptionspage%2FAutocorrectOptionsPage 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Freplace 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
20 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnew 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftextonly 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Fnewtext f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Forigtext 257 Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type. Wildcard character * in the end of word results the replacement of the word before arbitrary suffixes, too. Wildcard character * before the word results the replacement after arbitrary prefixes, too. For example, the pattern "i18n*" with the replacement text "internationalization" will find and replace "i18ns" with "internationalizations", or the pattern "*..." with the replacement text "…" will find and replace three dots in "word..." with the typographically correct precomposed Unicode horizontal ellipsis ("word…").
24 cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2Ftabview 12f Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
2c cui%2Fui%2Facorreplacepage%2FAcorReplacePage 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautodouble 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fautoabbrev 12e Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialog.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewdouble 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdoublelist b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
25 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fnewabbrev 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fdouble ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
22 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrev d3 Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation.
26 cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2Fabbrevlist 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fautocorrectdialog%2Flang 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
2a cui%2Fui%2Facorexceptpage%2FAcorExceptPage 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdefaultsingle 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fenddouble 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fendsingle 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartdouble 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoubledouble 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fstartsingle 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fdoublereplace 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fsinglereplace 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Fchecklist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
24 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2Flist 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
32 cui%2Fui%2Fapplylocalizedpage%2FApplyLocalizedPage 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT 9f To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 1c Opens the Spellcheck dialog.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR 9f To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 66 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST f7 When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ed Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2Fvalueset 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fpickbulletpage%2FPickBulletPage 38 Displays the different bullet styles that you can apply.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2Fvalueset 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fpicknumberingpage%2FPickNumberingPage 3b Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2Fvalueset 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickoutlinepage%2FPickOutlinePage 8e Displays the different styles that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Flinkgraphics 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2Fvalueset 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fpickgraphicpage%2FPickGraphicPage 4f Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in a bulleted list.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Forientlb 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fkeepratio 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fheightmf 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fwidthmf 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbullet 4a Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsublevels 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fcolor 2f Select a color for the current numbering style.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fcharstyle 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fsuffix a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fbitmap 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
28 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fprefix 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fstartat 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Fnumfmtlb 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Flevellb 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2Frelsize 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
36 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingoptionspage%2FNumberingOptionsPage 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fstandard 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentatmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2FNumberingPositionPage 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Findentmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumdistmf 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Falignedatmf 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentmf f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnum2alignlb 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumalignlb 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Findentatmf 7c Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fatmf 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Frelative 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Flevellb 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2FOutlinePositionPage 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
33 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumberingwidthmf 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foutlinepositionpage%2Fnumalignlb 125 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
32 cui%2Fui%2Fnumberingpositionpage%2Fnumfollowedbylb 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fassign 6e Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
30 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Frun 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
37 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewlibrary 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 15 Crea unha biblioteca.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 44 Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 73 Localice a biblioteca de $[officename] Basic que desexa engadir á lista actual e, a continuación, prema en Abrir.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
3a modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacronameedit 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
31 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fedit 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 31 Mostra as macros e caixas de diálogo existentes.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
35 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Forganize 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Organizador de diálogos, onde pode engadir, editar ou eliminar calquera módulo, caixa de diálogo ou biblioteca de macro existente.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fnewmodule 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fdelete 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
36 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Flibraries c4 Mostra as bibliotecas e módulos nos cales pode abrir ou gardar as súas macros. Para gardar unha macro cun documento específico, abra o documento e, a continuación, abra esta caixa de diálogo.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 44 Abre a macro ou caixa de diálogo seleccionada para a súa edición.
33 modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2Fmacros 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
3d modules%2FBasicIDE%2Fui%2Fbasicmacrodialog%2FBasicMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 4e Abre o editor de $[officename] Basic para modificar a biblioteca seleccionada.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 22 Opens a dialog to organize macros.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 6e Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 2b Opens a dialog where you can start a macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
24 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FconfirmpassEntry 32 Reenter the new password for the selected library.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FnewpassEntry 3d Introduza un novo contrasinal para a biblioteca seleccionada.
20 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FoldpassEntry 3a Introduza o contrasinal actual da biblioteca seleccionada.
22 svx%2Fui%2Fpasswd%2FPasswordDialog 32 Protexe cun contrasinal a biblioteca seleccionada.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 2e Opens a dialog where you can organize scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 50 Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 7e Engade a biblioteca seleccionada como ficheiro só de lectura. A biblioteca cárgase de novo cada vez que inicia %PRODUCTNAME.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 40 Substitúe unha biblioteca do mesmo nome pola biblioteca actual.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customizes $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcommands 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS 7d Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fmacroselectordialog%2Fcategories 5e Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 29 Opens a submenu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 71 Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 47 Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 32 Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3AEDIT_MENU_NAME 76 Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fmovemenu%2FMoveMenuDialog 6e Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 3c Restabelece os valores modificados aos valores predefinidos.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 44 Elimina os elementos seleccionados sen solicitar unha confirmación.
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 49 Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 79 Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 22 The Toolbar button opens a submenu
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 21 The Modify button opens a submenu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 6c Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT 99 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fclose 10 Pecha o diálogo
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fopen 4d Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
28 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fdelete 44 Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ftest 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fedit 32 Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fsave 56 Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
31 filter%2Fui%2Fxsltfilterdialog%2FXSLTFilterDialog 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fnew 2d Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Ffilterlist 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2FXMLFilterSettingsDialog 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltersettings%2Fhelp 27 Displays the help page for this dialog.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 7d Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files.
33 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fdescription 1b Enter a comment (optional).
35 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Finterfacename 4d Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fextension 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Ffiltername 5a Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog.
33 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2Fapplication 3c Select the application that you want to use with the filter.
3f filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagegeneral%2FXmlFilterTabPageGeneral 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltimport 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Ftempimport 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fxsltexport 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowsetemp 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowseimport 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
3b filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fbrowseexport 1e Opens a file selection dialog.
32 filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2Fdoc 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
4d filter%2Fui%2Fxmlfiltertabpagetransformation%2FXmlFilterTabPageTransformation 31 Enter or edit file information for an XML filter.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 5f Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 59 Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 3c Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE a0 Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 26 Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 33 Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL aa Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 68 Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 81 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 57 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 4b Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ae Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 24 Opens the Select Certificate dialog.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 22 Opens the View Certificate dialog.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 70 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 8c By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 54 When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 95 While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 51 Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
e .uno%3AGallery 59 Opens the Gallery, where you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 82 Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchangepath 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautodownload 90 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 3b Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 1c Continues a paused download.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 1f Installs the downloaded update.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9c Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 57 Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
2c desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2Fextensions 7b Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%2Fui%2Fextensionmanager%2FExtensionManagerDialog 5c The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 16 Re-enter the password.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 16 Re-enter the password.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm2ed 16 Re-enter the password.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 33 Prema para ir á páxina do asistente especificada.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fconfirm1ed 16 Re-enter the password.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass2ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
1d sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fpass1ed 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2FPasswordDialog 2e Type a password. A password is case sensitive.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablea11y 35 Select to enable text access for accessibility tools.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeform 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeinsdel 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangenone 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprinthigh 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintnone 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopeninternet 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fopenpdf c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpage 41 Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexporturl 82 Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fexport 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fpageonly 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Feffects 4d Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fdisplay 5e Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fcenter 52 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fresize 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fconvert d2 Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
39 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2FPdfUserInterfacePage 5a Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
34 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblebookmark 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fdefaultlayout 6a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fprintlow 65 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwidth 61 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fquality 2d Enter the quality level for JPEG compression.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fjpegcompress ca Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitwin 62 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fvisiblelevel 5d Select to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
31 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fallbookmarks 46 Select to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fopen 69 Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitdefault b7 Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
26 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontlayout 4f Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fthumbs 54 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2FPdfViewPage 40 Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Flosslesscompress 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpdfa ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
23 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Foutline 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Ftoolbar 40 Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
2a filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fenablecopy 35 Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
20 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fzoom 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Femptypages 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2FPdfGeneralPage 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffirstonleft 101 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Frange 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fforms 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2FPdfLinksPage 141 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Freduceresolution 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
27 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fcomments 45 Selects to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Ftagged 47 Selects to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fallowdups 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fcontfacinglayout 96 Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
2d filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangecomment 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fsetpassword 49 Prema para mostrar a caixa de diálogo no cal seleccionar outro cartafol.
2f filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2FPdfSecurityPage 49 Prema para mostrar a caixa de diálogo no cal seleccionar outro cartafol.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fembed 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Ffitvis 7a Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fbookmarks f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fresolution 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdflinkspage%2Fdefault 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
2b filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fwindow 41 Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fselection 1e Exports the current selection.
25 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fformat 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
28 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfviewpage%2Fsinglelayout 3c Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
24 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fpages 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
29 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfsecuritypage%2Fchangeany 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
22 filter%2Fui%2Fpdfgeneralpage%2Fall 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
2c filter%2Fui%2Fpdfuserinterfacepage%2Fmenubar 41 Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF a6 Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6a Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 51 Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 56 Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 3a This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 39 Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 30 Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 70 Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 3c Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME 16 Definir a resolución.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 29 Adds, renames, and removes XForms models.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 1f Declares the item as read-only.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 1e Declares the item as relevant.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 4f Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE ac Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 125 Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elseswhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 71 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f3 Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 65 Prema a icona Imprimir para imprimir o documento activo coa configuración de impresión predefinida.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 1aa Debuxa, desde onde se arrastra, unha liña que remata nun texto explicativo rectangular con dirección vertical. Para redimensionar o texto explicativo arrastre unha das súas agarradoiras. Para engadir texto prema o seu bordo e escriba ou pegue o texto. Pode arredondalo arrastrando a agarradoira do canto maior cando o apuntador se converte nunha man. Só dispoñíbel cando está activado o soporte para idiomas asiáticos.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 15d Debuxa unha caixa de texto con dirección vertical ao premer ou arrastrar o cursor. Prema calquera lugar do documento e escriba ou pegue o seu texto. Tamén pode mover o cursor ata o lugar onde desexa engadir o texto, arrastrar unha caixa de texto e escribir ou pegar o texto. Só dispoñíbel cando está activado o soporte para idiomas asiáticos.
f .uno%3ADrawText e9 Debuxa unha caixa de texto co texto en horizontal ao arrastrar. Arrastre unha caixa de texto ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado en calquera lugar do documento e escriba ou pegue o texto. Rode a caixa de texto para obter un texto rodado.
a .uno%3APie 1ab Debuxa unha forma chea definida polo arco dunha forma oval e por dúas liñas de raio. Para debuxar un sector elíptico, arrastre unha forma oval ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado e prema para definir a primeira liña de raio. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexa situar a segunda liña de raio e prema. Non é necesario premer na forma oval. Para debuxar un sector circular, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
a .uno%3AArc 156 Debuxa un arco. Para facelo, arrastre unha forma oval ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado e despois prema para definir o punto inicial do arco. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexe situar o punto final e prema. Non é necesario premer na forma oval. Para debuxar un arco baseado nun círculo, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 1c1 Debuxa unha forma chea definida polo arco dun círculo e por unha liña de diámetro. Para debuxar un segmento circular, arrastre un círculo ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado e prema para definir o punto inicial da liña de diámetro. Mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexa situar o punto final da liña de diámetro e prema. Non é necesario premer no círculo. Para debuxar un segmento elíptico, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled be Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 168 Debuxa unha curva de Bézier suave. Prema no lugar onde desexa que comece a curva, arrastre, solte e mova o apuntador ata o lugar onde desexa que remate a curva e prema. Mova o apuntador e prema de novo para engadir un segmento de liña recta á curva. Prema dúas veces para rematar o debuxo da curva. Se o fai no seu punto inicial creará unha forma pechada.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 169 Debuxa, desde onde se arrastra, unha liña que remata nun texto explicativo rectangular con dirección horizontal. Para redimensionar un texto explicativo arrastre unha das súas agarradoiras. Para engadirlle texto, prema no seu bordo e escriba ou pegue o texto. Pode arredondalo arrastrando a agarradoira do canto maior cando o apuntador se converte nunha man.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee c4 Insire un texto animado con dirección horizontal. Arrastre un marco de texto e escriba ou pegue o seu texto. Para atribuír o efecto de animación, escolla Formato - Texto -  Animación de texto.
b .uno%3ARect e5 Debuxa un rectángulo ao arrastrar o apuntador. Para debuxar un cadrado, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra. Prema no lugar onde desexa situar un dos cantos do rectángulo e arrastre ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado.
e .uno%3AEllipse d8 Debuxa unha forma oval ao arrastrar o apuntador. Prema no lugar onde desexa debuxar a forma oval e arrastre ata alcanzar o tamaño desexado. Para debuxar un círculo, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
b .uno%3ALine 87 Debuxa unha liña recta ao arrastrar o apuntador. Para restrinxir a liña a 45 graos, manteña premida a tecla Maiús mentres arrastra.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 12a Debuxa unha liña composta dunha serie de segmentos en liña recta. Arrastre para debuxar un segmento da liña, prema para definir o seu punto final e arrastre para debuxar un novo segmento. Prema dúas veces para rematar o debuxo da liña. Se o fai no seu punto inicial creará unha forma pechada.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 7d Prema para abrir ou pechar a barra Debuxo, onde pode engadir formas, liñas, texto e textos explicativos ao documento actual.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 32 Abre a barra de ferramentas Deseño de formulario.
e .uno%3AListBox 19 Crea unha caixa de lista.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 18 Crea botóns de opción.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 18 Crea botóns de opción.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 18 Crea un botón de ordes.
f .uno%3AComboBox 20 Crea unha caixa de combinación.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 18 Crea un campo formatado.
f .uno%3ACombobox 20 Crea unha caixa de combinación.
b .uno%3AEdit 19 Crea unha caixa de texto.
c .uno%3ALabel 2d Crea un campo para a visualización de texto.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 1d Crea caixas de verificación.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 2b Abre a barra de ferramentas Máis Controis.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 1d Crea caixas de verificación.
d .uno%3AConfig 55 The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nun control de imaxe.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo de patrón.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo numérico.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 37 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo horario.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 38 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo de datos.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 43 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha selección de ficheiros.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo formatado.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 3b O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón de opción.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 41 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de combinación.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 42 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de verificación.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de lista.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón de imaxe.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 34 O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha etiqueta.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 39 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun campo monetario.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 30 O control seleccionado transfórmase nun botón.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 3a O control seleccionado transfórmase nunha caixa de texto.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 71 Abre un submenú que permite seleccionar un tipo de control para substituír o control seleccionado no documento.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 8d In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 4e Abre un submenú onde pode seleccionar as columnas que desexa mostrar de novo.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 1e Oculta a columna seleccionada.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 1f Elimina a columna seleccionada.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 2e Prema Todo se quere mostrar todas as columnas.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Mostrar columnas.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL 76 Abre un submenú para seleccionar un campo de datos que substitúa o campo de datos seleccionado no control de táboa.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL 57 Abre un submenú para seleccionar un campo de datos e incorporalo no control de táboa.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 57 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite editar as propiedades dun control seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 57 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite editar as propiedades dun control seleccionado.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 7a Especifica se os elementos de posicionamento deben mostrarse ou ocultarse no control seleccionado na barra de navegación.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE f7 Especifica en "unidades de valor" o tamaño do cursor da barra de desprazamento. Un valor de "Valor máx. de desprazamento" menos "Valor mín. de desprazamento" / 2 resulta nun cursor da barra de desprazamento que ocupa a metade da área de fondo.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 5b Especifica se as iconas da barra de navegación seleccionada deben ser grandes ou pequenas.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 66 Especifica o código de formato do control. Prema no botón ... para seleccionar o código do formato.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Especifica información adicional ou un texto descritivo do campo de control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 60 Define un valor para o campo de control que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 59 Determina unha data que non pode ser excedida por ningún valor introducido polo usuario.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR ba Se a caixa de texto se usa como entrada de contrasinal, introduza o código ASCII do carácter de visualización. Ese carácter mostrarase en lugar dos caracteres tecleados polo usuario.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 36 Pode introducir os datos herdados polo control oculto.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 4e Pode introducir un carácter ou cadea de caracteres para o símbolo monetario.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 63 Determina se o símbolo monetario debe mostrarse antes ou despois do número nos campos monetarios.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 9f On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 73 Especifica se os elementos de acción deben mostrarse ou ocultarse no control seleccionado na barra de navegación.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 81 Nos campos de texto seleccione o código de fin de liña que se vai utilizar ao escribir un texto nunha columna de base de datos.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 122 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 1e Estabelece a data predefinida.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 1e Estabelece a hora predefinida.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 3a Redimensiona a imaxe para adecuala ao tamaño do control..
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 5b A propiedade Tabulación determina se un campo de control pode seleccionarse coa tecla Tab.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 41 Especifica o valor mínimo dun control de barra de desprazamento.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2f Define o valor predefinido do campo de control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 83 A propiedade Orde de tabulación determina a orde seguida no formulario para enfocar os controis ao premer na tecla de tabulación.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 58 Determina se o bordo do campo debe mostrarse "Sen marco", con "Aparencia 3D" ou "Plano".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Especifica o tipo de letra da etiqueta do control.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 5b Especifica se a barra de navegación debe mostrarse no bordo inferior do control da táboa.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 3e Pode definir o formato desexado para a visualización da hora.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 4e Especifica se se desexa mostrar o campo de control na impresión do documento.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 3e Determina a data máis temperá que o usuario pode introducir.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 3b Especifica a altura de fila dun campo de control de táboa.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 20 Insire un separador de millares.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 51 Se define esta opción escollendo "Si", enfócase o botón da orde ao premer nel.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE 102 Permítelle usar quebras de liña e formatados nun campo de control como, por exemplo, as caixas de texto ou as etiquetas. Para introducir manualmente unha quebra de liña, prema Intro. Seleccione "Multiliña con formatado" para introducir o texto formatado.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 60 Define un valor para o campo de control que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 60 Define un valor para o campo de control que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 77 Especifica se os elementos de navegación deben mostrarse ou ocultarse no control seleccionado na barra de navegación.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 8d Define a máscara de edición. Ao especificar un código de carácter pódese determinar o que pode introducir o usuario no campo de control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 52 A propiedade Acción determina a acción que se debe iniciar ao activar un botón.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 21 Determines spin button intervals.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 58 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 47 Engade á caixa de texto o tipo de barra de desprazamento especificada.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 47 Engade á caixa de texto o tipo de barra de desprazamento especificada.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 41 Especifica o valor máximo dun control de barra de desprazamento.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 50 Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6f A opción "Si" transforma o campo de control nun botón xiratorio en que se engaden as frechas correspondentes.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5e Se a función de formato estrito está activada (Si), só se aceptan os caracteres permitidos.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 62 Especifica a cor dos símbolos dos controis, por exemplo, as frechas dunha barra de desprazamento.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 47 Engade á caixa de texto o tipo de barra de desprazamento especificada.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 2a Define a cor de fondo do campo de control.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 35 Define o valor predefinido da barra de desprazamento.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 63 A propiedade Imaxes especifica o nome do ficheiro e o camiño da imaxe que quere exhibir no botón.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE 102 Permítelle usar quebras de liña e formatados nun campo de control como, por exemplo, as caixas de texto ou as etiquetas. Para introducir manualmente unha quebra de liña, prema Intro. Seleccione "Multiliña con formatado" para introducir o texto formatado.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 6b Especifica o valor que se debe sumar ou subtraer cando o usuario preme na frecha da barra de desprazamento.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3b Define a posición en X do control en relación á áncora.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2f Define o valor predefinido do campo de control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 7f Especifica se a primeira columna se debe mostrar ou non con etiquetas de filas en que o rexistro actual se marque cunha frecha.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4e Especifica a opción de aliñamento do texto ou das imaxes usadas nun control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 4a Especifica a entrada da caixa de lista que debe marcarse como predefinida.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 5b Especifica se se ocultan as seleccións de texto cando os controis xa non están enfocados.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 38 Determina a hora mínima que pode introducir un usuario.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 105 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8b Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Dropdown" option.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3c Especifica o atraso en milisegundos entre eventos repetidos.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 7d Especifica unha etiqueta de lote en URL que se refire a un documento de axuda e que pode abrirse mediante o campo de control.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 46 Determina o número de díxitos mostrados á dereita do punto decimal.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 42 Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No).
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 1c Define a largura do control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 59 Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 1b Define a altura do control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 5b Especifica a cor de bordo dos controis que teñen a propiedade Bordo definida como "plana".
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3b Define a posición en Y do control en relación á áncora.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 41 Here, you can determine the format you want for the date readout.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 5f Se o campo de control ten a propiedade "Activado" (Si), o usuario do formulario pode utilizalo.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 6b Especifica o valor que se debe sumar ou subtraer cando o usuario preme na frecha da barra de desprazamento.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 45 Define o número máximo de caracteres que o usuario pode introducir.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 80 Especifica se se repite a acción dun control, como un botón xiratorio, ao premer no control e manter premido o botón do rato.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 67 A propiedade Botón predefinido especifica que se activará o botón correspondente ao premer en Intro.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 6a Especifica se as caixas de verificación e os botóns de opción se mostran en 3D (predefinido) ou planos.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2f Define o valor predefinido do campo de control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 20 Define onde se ancora o control.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 58 A propiedade Etiqueta define a etiqueta do campo de control que se mostra no formulario.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 93 Especifica se unha caixa de verificación tamén pode representar valores CERO dunha base de datos ligada, á parte dos valores VERDADEIRO e FALSO.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 4c Determina unha hora que ningún valor introducido polo usuario pode exceder.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 48 Atribúe a función Encher automaticamente a unha caixa de combinación.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 40 Permítelle seleccionar máis dun elemento dunha caixa de lista.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5a Ofrece a opción de introducir un texto de axuda que se mostra como suxestión no control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4e Especifica a opción de aliñamento do texto ou das imaxes usadas nun control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 5c Seleccione o modo de ligazón das caixas de lista coas celas ligadas nas follas de cálculo.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 8a Especifica a referencia a unha cela ligada nunha folla de cálculo. O contido ou estado activo do control está ligado ao contido da cela.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL 105 Ao deseñar o seu formulario pode definir a propiedade "Proposta de filtro" para cada caixa de texto do separador Datos da caixa de diálogo Propiedades correspondente. Nas seguintes buscas en modo filtro, pode utilizar toda a información contida neses campos.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL c9 Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE d8 En formularios de bases de datos, especifica a fonte de datos do contido de lista do elemento de formulario. Este campo pode usarse para definir unha lista de valores para documentos sen conexión con bases de datos.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 5b Determina os datos con que se deben encher as listas nas caixas de combinación e de lista.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN cf Use un índice para especificar o campo da táboa ou a consulta SQL da táboa que desexa ligar ao campo fornecido en Campo de datos. Os valores válidos para esta propiedade son 1, 2, 3 e así sucesivamente.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 4f Especifica o campo da táboa da fonte de datos ao cal fai referencia o control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE f3 Pode introducir un valor referencial para o formulario web. Ese valor remitirase ao servidor cando se envíe o formulario. Nos formularios de base de datos, o valor introducido grávase no campo da base de datos atribuído ao campo de control.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 79 Introduza un intervalo de celas que conteña as entradas dunha caixa de lista ou de combinación dunha folla de cálculo.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 4a O evento Rato fóra acontece cando o rato está fóra do campo de control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 76 O evento Botón do rato premido acontece ao premer o botón do rato mentres o apuntador está situado sobre o control.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 45 O evento Movemento do rato acontece ao mover o rato sobre o control..
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 66 O evento Tecla premida acontece cando o usuario preme calquera tecla mentres o control está enfocado.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 48 O evento Ao recibir o foco acontece cando se enfoca un campo de control.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 50 O evento Estado modificado acontece se se modifica o estado do campo de control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 5d O evento Texto modificado acontece se se introduce ou modifica un texto nun campo de entrada.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 49 O evento Rato dentro acontece se o rato está dentro do campo de control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 55 O evento Ao perder o foco acontece cando un campo de control deixa de estar enfocado.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 67 O evento Modificado acontece cando se modifica o contido do control tras deixar de estar este enfocado.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 78 O evento Botón do rato liberado acontece ao liberar o botón do rato mentres o apuntador está situado sobre o control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 72 Nesta caixa de diálogo pode especificar, entre outras cousas, a fonte de datos e os eventos de todo o formulario.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 3d Especifica o tipo de codificación da transferencia de datos.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 4d Especifica o método para transferir a información do formulario completado.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 5b O evento Houbo un erro actívase cando acontece un erro durante o acceso á fonte de datos.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 75 O evento Despois de modificar o rexistro acontece inmediatamente despois de modificar o apuntador do rexistro actual.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 67 O evento Despois da acción no rexistro acontece inmediatamente despois de modificar o rexistro actual.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 54 O evento Antes da acción no rexistro acontece antes de modificar o rexistro actual.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 78 O evento Antes de descargar acontece antes de descargar o formulario, ou sexa, antes de separalo da súa fonte de datos.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 70 O evento Encher parámetros acontece cando o formulario que se vai cargar posúe parámetros que deben encherse.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 4e O evento Ao recargar acontece inmediatamente despois de recargar o formulario.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 4a O evento Ao cargar acontece inmediatamente despois de cargar o formulario.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 62 O evento Antes de modificar o rexistro acontece antes de modificar o apuntador do rexistro actual.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 49 O evento Antes de enviar acontece antes de enviar os datos do formulario.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 5e O evento Confirmar eliminación acontece no momento en que se eliminan os datos do formulario.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 4d O evento Despois de restaurar acontece despois de restabelecer un formulario.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 84 O evento Ao descargar acontece imediatamente despois de descargar o formulario, ou sexa, despois de separalo da súa fonte de datos.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 43 O evento Antes de recargar acontece antes de recargar o formulario.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 49 O evento Antes de restaurar acontece antes de restabelecer un formulario.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 6e O evento Despois de actualizar acontece despois de gravar na fonte de datos o control modificado polo usuario.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 87 Se crea un subformulario, introduza o campo de datos do formulario superior responsábel da sincronización entre el e o subformulario.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 29 Determina se é posíbel modificar datos.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 2b Determina se é posíbel eliminar os datos.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 27 Determina se é posíbel engadir datos.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 41 Determina como facer a navegación usando a tecla de tabulación.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 58 Especifica se poden usarse as funcións de navegación da barra de formularios inferior.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 6e Determina se o formulario só permite incluír datos novos (Si) ou se tamén permite outras propiedades (Non).
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 94 Define se a fonte de datos vai ser unha táboa ou consulta existente na base de datos ou se o formulario vai xerarse a partir dunha instrución SQL.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA a2 Especifica as condicións para ordenar os datos no formulario. A especificación das condicións de ordenación segue as regras SQL sen usar a cláusula ORDER BY.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE fc Determina que contido debe utilizarse para o formulario. Pode ser unha táboa ou consulta previamente creada na base de datos ou pode definirse mediante unha instrución SQL. Antes de introducir un contido debe definir o tipo exacto en Tipo de contido.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 7e Se crea un subformulario, introduza a variábel onde se poidan almacenar os valores posíbeis do campo do formulario superior.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 41 Define a fonte de datos a que debe facer referencia o formulario.
2f modules%2Fspropctrlr%2Fui%2Ftaborder%2FCTRLtree 7b Lista os controis do formulario, que se poden seleccionar coa tecla de tabulación na orde especificada de arriba a abaixo.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 83 A caixa de diálogo Orde de tabulación permite modificar a orde de enfoque dos campos de control ao premer a tecla de tabulación.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
f .uno%3AAddField 52 Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode be Activa ou desactiva o modo deseño. Esta función úsase para alternar rapidamente entre os modos deseño e usuario. Actívea para editar os controis de formulario e desactívea para usalos.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode be Activa ou desactiva o modo deseño. Esta función úsase para alternar rapidamente entre os modos deseño e usuario. Actívea para editar os controis de formulario e desactívea para usalos.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1f Renomea o obxecto seleccionado.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1f Elimina a entrada seleccionada.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN a6 Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 8f Engade novos elementos ao formulario. A función Engadir só pode seleccionarse se hai un formulario seleccionado no Explorador de formularios.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 3d Abre a caixa de diálogo Propiedades da entrada seleccionada.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 78 O Explorador de formularios contén unha lista dos formularios creados (lóxicos) cos campos de control correspondentes.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 7f Abre o Explorador de formularios, que mostra os formularios e subformularios do documento actual cos seus respectivos controis.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3e Abre os formularios en modo deseño para que se poidan editar.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 59 Especifica se o asistente debe iniciarse de forma automática ao inserir un novo control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 73 Especifica se a xanela Estilos e formatado debe mostrarse ou ocultarse. Nela atribúense e organízanse os estilos.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 54 Atribúe un estilo ao parágrafo actual e aos obxectos ou parágrafos seleccionados.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 54 Atribúe un estilo ao parágrafo actual e aos obxectos ou parágrafos seleccionados.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 54 Atribúe un estilo ao parágrafo actual e aos obxectos ou parágrafos seleccionados.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 58 Permítelle seleccionar un nome de tipo de letra na lista ou introducir un directamente.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 6f Permítelle introducir un tamaño de tipo de letra ou escoller entre os diferentes tamaños presentes na lista.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2c Especifica a dirección horizontal do texto.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2a Especifica a dirección vertical do texto.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 99 Prema na icona Reducir sangría para reducir a sangría esquerda do contido da cela ou do parágrafo e estabelecela na posición de tabulación anterior.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 99 Prema na icona Reducir sangría para reducir a sangría esquerda do contido da cela ou do parágrafo e estabelecela na posición de tabulación anterior.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 119 Aplica a cor de realce actual ao fondo dunha selección de texto. Se non hai texto seleccionado, prema na icona Realce, seleccione o texto que desexa realzar e prema de novo na icona. Para cambiar a cor de realce, prema na frecha situada ao lado da icona e despois na cor desexada.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor 9a Prema para abrir a barra de ferramentas onde pode escoller unha cor de fondo para aplicala ao fondo do parágrafo actual ou dos parágrafos seleccionados.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 65 Para aumentar o espazamento superior do parágrafo seleccionado, prema na icona Aumentar espazamento.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 65 Para diminuír o espazamento superior do parágrafo seleccionado, prema na icona Reducir espazamento.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 78 Premendo na icona Bordos aparece a barra de ferramentas onde pode modificar o bordo dun obxecto ou da área dunha folla.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 78 Prema nesta icona para abrir a barra de ferramentas Estilo de liña, a cal permite modificar o estilo de liña do bordo.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 86 Prema na icona Cor de liña (do bordo) para abrir a barra de ferramentas Cor de bordo, que permite cambiar a cor do bordo dun obxecto.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 6c Abre unha barra de ferramentas que contén funcións para a optimización das filas e columnas dunha táboa.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 80 Abre a barra de ferramentas Puntas de frecha. Use os símbolos mostrados para definir o estilo do extremo da liña seleccionada.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Roda o obxecto seleccionado.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 32 Modifica o aliñamento dos obxectos seleccionados.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 5c Baixa o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 5c Baixa o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 5b Sobe o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 5b Sobe o parágrafo seleccionado un nivel dentro dunha xerarquía de numeración ou viñetas.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 3b Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado antes do situado sobre el.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 3b Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado antes do situado sobre el.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 40 Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado despois do situado debaixo del.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 40 Coloca o parágrafo seleccionado despois do situado debaixo del.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 4d Atribúe viñetas aos parágrafos seleccionados ou elimínallas se as teñen.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 9f Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
d .uno%3AReload 3c Substitúe o documento actual pola última versión gardada.
a SID_RELOAD 3c Substitúe o documento actual pola última versión gardada.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE e9 Para activar un cursor de selección en textos só de lectura ou na Axuda, escolla Editar - Seleccionar texto ou abra o menú de contexto dun documento só de lectura e escolla Seleccionar texto. O cursor de selección non pestanexa.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode e9 Para activar un cursor de selección en textos só de lectura ou na Axuda, escolla Editar - Seleccionar texto ou abra o menú de contexto dun documento só de lectura e escolla Seleccionar texto. O cursor de selección non pestanexa.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 49 Permítelle editar documentos só de lectura ou táboas de base de datos.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3f Activa ou desactiva o modo edición da táboa de base de datos.
b .uno%3AStop 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 66 Exporta o documento directamente como PDF. Non se mostra ningunha caixa de diálogo de configuración.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Exhibe información sobre o documento activo de %PRODUCTNAMEBasic.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 83 Mostra a posición do cursor no documento de %PRODUCTNAME Basic. Especifícase o número da fila e, a seguir, o número da columna.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 40 Restabelece o estado orixinal das entradas da caixa de diálogo.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 1d Aplica os datos ao documento.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 25 Pecha a caixa de diálogo sen gardar.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 36 Seleccione o tipo de hiperligazón que desexa inserir.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 1b Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 46 Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite crear e editar hiperligazóns.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 40 Especifica a posición no documento de destino á cal desexa ir.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 47 Especifica se a hiperligazón debe inserirse como texto ou como botón.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 44 Permítelle iniciar a sesión no enderezo FTP como usuario anónimo.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 45 Insire o destino no campo Destino da caixa de diálogo Hiperligazón.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 9e Abre a caixa de diálogo Atribuír macro para atribuír a eventos como "rato sobre o obxecto" ou "activar hiperligazón" os seus propios códigos de programa.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 46 Especifica o nome de inicio de sesión, se traballa con enderezos FTP.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c4 Introduza o nome do marco en que desexa abrir o ficheiro ligado ou seleccione un marco predefinido da lista. Se deixa esta caixa está en branco, o ficheiro ligado ábrese na xanela do explorador.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 42 Especifica o texto visíbel ou a lenda do botón da hiperligazón.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 38 Especifica o contrasinal, se traballa con enderezos FTP.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 35 Abre un explorador da web para cargar o URL desexado.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1d Crea unha hiperligazón http.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 63 Tras introducir a hiperligazón, prema Pechar para definir a ligazón e saír da caixa de diálogo.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1d Crea unha hiperligazón http.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 27 Introduza un nome para a hiperligazón.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 1c Crea unha hiperligazón FTP.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 24 Especifica o asunto da nova mensaxe.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 6c Especifica o URL completo do destinatario, no formato mailto:nome@fornecedor.com ou news:grupo.servidor.com.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 32 Atribúe un enderezo de noticias á hiperligazón.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 49 Atribúe o enderezo de correo electrónico especificado á hiperligazón.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 49 Atribúe o enderezo de correo electrónico especificado á hiperligazón.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 24 Opens the Target in Document dialog.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 33 Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 3a Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 27 Volve á páxina anterior do documento.
d .uno%3APageUp 27 Volve á páxina anterior do documento.
f .uno%3ANextPage 25 Vai á seguinte páxina do documento.
f .uno%3APageDown 25 Vai á seguinte páxina do documento.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 30 Desprázase ata a primeira páxina do documento.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 30 Desprázase ata a primeira páxina do documento.
f .uno%3ALastPage 2f Desprázase ata a última páxina do documento.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 2f Desprázase ata a última páxina do documento.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE b3 Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 68 Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 37 Abre a base de datos seleccionada para a súa edición.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 49 Cancela a configuración de filtro e exhibe todos os rexistros da táboa.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 4d Reconstrúe a visualización da táboa despois de modificar a súa estrutura.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Actualiza os datos mostrados.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 49 Insire na posición do cursor os campos do rexistro marcado no documento.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fautoformat 93 Abre a caixa de diálogo Formato automático, que permite seleccionar estilos de formato que se aplican inmediatamente despois de inserir a táboa.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Frowonly 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fcolumnname 63 Utiliza os nomes de campo da táboa de base de datos como títulos das columnas da táboa de texto.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableheading 53 Especifica se debe inserirse unha liña de título nas columnas da táboa de texto.
3d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ffromdatabase 24 Acepta os formatos da base de datos.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallleft 50 Elimina todos os campos de base de datos da caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fallright 50 Move os campos listados da base de datos á caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftableformat 8f Abre a caixa de diálogo Formato de táboa, que permite a definición das propiedades da táboa, isto é, bordos, fondo e largura das columnas.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneleft 44 Elimina o campo seleccionado da caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftablecols 44 Lista as columnas da base de datos que deben inserirse no documento.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fuserdefined 6a Especifica un formato da lista se non se acepta a información de formato de determinados campos de datos.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Foneright 44 Move o campo seleccionado ata a caixa de lista Columna(s) da táboa.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Ftabledbcols 50 Especifica as columnas da base de datos que se deben inserir na táboa de texto.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastable 5b Insire no documento datos en forma de táboa seleccionados do explorador de fonte de datos.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Finsertdbcolumnsdialog%2Fastext 56 Insire como texto no documento os datos seleccionados no explorador da fonte de datos.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 51 Actualiza o contido dos campos da base de datos por medio dos rexistros marcados.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 51 Actualiza o contido dos campos da base de datos por medio dos rexistros marcados.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Permite definir as opcións de filtraxe.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Permite definir as opcións de filtraxe.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval3 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval1 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond1 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond3 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fval2 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield1 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fcond2 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield3 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Ffield2 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect2 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2Fconnect1 4a Para os seguintes argumentos, escolla entre os operadores lóxicos E e OU.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fstandardfilterdialog%2FStandardFilterDialog 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 43 Especifica os nomes de campo da táboa para definilos no argumento.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 29 Especifica un valor para filtrar o campo.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 73 Especifica os operadores de comparación a través dos cales se ligan as entradas dos campos Nome de campo e Valor.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 47 Especifica os criterios de ordenación para a visualización dos datos.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 47 Especifica os criterios de ordenación para a visualización dos datos.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 61 Pecha a caixa de diálogo. A configuración da última busca gárdase ata que peche %PRODUCTNAME.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 43 Especifica a relación entre o termo de busca e o contido do campo.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1a Inicia ou cancela a busca.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 19 Busca en todos os campos.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 24 Permite buscar cos comodíns * ou ?.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 5e Especifica que a busca se realiza na dirección inversa, do último rexistro cara ao primeiro.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3d Introduza na caixa o termo de busca ou seleccióneo na lista.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 56 Especifica que durante a busca se teñan en conta as letras maiúsculas e minúsculas.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 5e Especifica que se teñen en conta os formatos de campo ao efectuar buscas no documento actual.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 6d Reinicia a busca. As buscas cara a adiante recomezan no primeiro rexistro e as cara a atrás fano no último.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 22 Busca nun campo de datos concreto.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 2d Indica que se van localizar campos sen datos.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 22 Busca nun campo de datos concreto.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 2d Indica que se van localizar campos con datos.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 3b Indica o formulario lóxico en que desexa realizar a busca.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3d Introduza na caixa o termo de busca ou seleccióneo na lista.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 31 Busca en táboas de bases de datos e formularios.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 60 Solicita ao servidor da base de datos que filtre os datos visíbeis cos criterios especificados.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 41 Alterna entre a visualización filtrada e non-filtrada da táboa.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 5b Activa unha visualización de táboa adicional cando está en visualización de formulario.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 4b Mostra a táboa ligada ao documento actual no explorador da fonte de datos.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 4b Mostra a táboa ligada ao documento actual no explorador da fonte de datos.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 2c Executa a consulta SQL e mostra o resultado.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 35 Elimina a consulta e as táboas da xanela de deseño.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 1d Insire a táboa seleccionada.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 2a Pecha a caixa de diálogo Engadir táboas.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 15 Só mostra consultas.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 13 Só mostra táboas.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 40 Especifica as táboas que se deben engadir na xanela de deseño.
f .uno%3AAddTable 40 Especifica as táboas que se deben engadir na xanela de deseño.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 47 Mostra a visualización de deseño ou a visualización SQL da consulta.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 7e En modo SQL nativo é posíbel introducir ordes SQL que $[officename] non interpreta e que van directamente á fonte de datos.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 66 Mostra a fila "Función" na parte inferior da visualización de deseño da xanela Deseño de consulta.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 47 Mostra a fila "Táboa" na parte inferior da xanela Deseño de consulta.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 47 Mostra a fila "Alcume" na parte inferior da xanela Deseño de consulta.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 62 Expande, por medio do parámetro DISTINCT, a instrución Select da consulta SQL na columna actual.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 2e Permite escoller obxectos do documento actual.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 7d Mostra o texto fonte do documento HTML. Para ver a fonte HTML de novos documentos ten antes que gardalos como documento HTML.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 7d Mostra o texto fonte do documento HTML. Para ver a fonte HTML de novos documentos ten antes que gardalos como documento HTML.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 92 Mostra o estilo de páxina actual. Prema dúas veces para editar o estilo ou prema co botón dereito do rato para seleccionar un estilo diferente.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 92 Mostra o estilo de páxina actual. Prema dúas veces para editar o estilo ou prema co botón dereito do rato para seleccionar un estilo diferente.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 92 Mostra o estilo de páxina actual. Prema dúas veces para editar o estilo ou prema co botón dereito do rato para seleccionar un estilo diferente.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 39 Especifica o factor de zoom da visualización da páxina.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 3c Aquí pódese alternar entre modos de selección diferentes.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 3c Aquí pódese alternar entre modos de selección diferentes.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus a6 Se aínda non se gardaron algúns cambios do documento, móstrase un «*» neste campo da barra de estado. Isto tamén se aplica a documentos novos aínda sen gardar.
f .uno%3AModified a6 Se aínda non se gardaron algúns cambios do documento, móstrase un «*» neste campo da barra de estado. Isto tamén se aplica a documentos novos aínda sen gardar.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus a6 Se aínda non se gardaron algúns cambios do documento, móstrase un «*» neste campo da barra de estado. Isto tamén se aplica a documentos novos aínda sen gardar.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 15 Mostra a hora actual.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 15 Mostra a data actual.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 33 Mellora ou aumenta a nitidez dos bordos do obxecto.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 27 Define a altura das pezas dos mosaicos.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 28 Define a largura das pezas dos mosaicos.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 6b Mostra a imaxe como un debuxo a carbón. Os contornos debúxanse en negro e as cores orixinais suprímense.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 48 Asocia pequenos grupos de píxeles en áreas rectangulares da mesma cor.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 99 Define a intensidade de envellecemento en porcentaxe. Ao 0% verá os valores de gris de todos os píxeles. Ao 100% só permanece a canle de cor vermella.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 28 Converte unha imaxe nun formato pop art.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 4a Abre unha caixa de diálogo para determinar o número de cores do póster.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia ac Todos os píxeles están definidos para valores de gris e as canles de cor verde e azul están reducidas a cantidade que espefique. A canle de cor vermella non se modifica.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 3c Suaviza ou esfuma a imaxe aplicando un filtro de paso baixo.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Especifica o nivel de brillo, en porcentaxe, por riba do cal deben solarizarse os píxeles.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize cd Abre unha caixa de diálogo para definir a solarización. A solarización é un efecto semellante ao que acontece cando hai exceso de luz durante o revelado fotográfico. As cores invértense parcialmente.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 70 Esta icona da barra Imaxe abre a barra Filtro gráfico, onde pode utilizar varios filtros na imaxe seleccionada.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 3c Especifica o número de cores a que se debe reducir a imaxe.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 28 Elimina ruido aplicando un filtro medio.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 32 Especifica tamén para inverter todos os píxeles.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 31 Aumenta a imaxe aplicando un filtro de paso alto.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 8e Inverte os valores da cor dunha imaxe en cor ou os de brillo dunha imaxe en escala de grises. Aplique o filtro de novo para reverter o efecto.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 31 Mostra unha caixa de diálogo para crear relevos.
f .uno%3AGrafMode ad Lista os atributos de visualización do obxecto gráfico seleccionado. O obxecto gráfico incorporado ou ligado ao ficheiro non se modifica, só a visualización do obxecto.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 55 Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 57 Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 4f Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 35 Especifica o brillo do obxecto gráfico seleccionado.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 48 Especifica o contraste da visualización da imaxe gráfica seleccionada.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 55 Abre a barra de ferramentas Formas básicas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 54 Abre a barra de ferramentas Frechas largas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 66 Abre a barra de ferramentas Textos explicativos, que permite inserir elementos gráficos no documento.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 57 A barra de ferramentas Cor permite editar algunhas propiedades do obxecto seleccionado.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 54 Abre a barra de ferramentas Frechas largas, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 4d Abre a Galería de Fontwork, que permite inserir texto gráfico no documento.
e .uno%3ADBLimit 4b Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 93 First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.
33 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fnondistinct 21 Not use distinct values in query.
30 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2Fdistinct 1d Use distinct values in query.
3d dbaccess%2Fui%2Fquerypropertiesdialog%2FQueryPropertiesDialog 1d Use distinct values in query.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 4f Abre a barra de ferramentas Símbolos, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 4f Abre a barra de ferramentas Símbolos, que permite inserir imaxes no documento.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX 66 Na caixa de lista situada na parte superior pode seleccionar outros módulos da Axuda de %PRODUCTNAME.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND 47 Busca en toda a páxina da Axuda, comeza na posición actual do cursor.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 3c Distingue entre texto en maiúsculas e texto en minúsculas.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 20 Só localiza palabras completas.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 37 Busca cara a atrás desde a posición actual do cursor.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 51 Introduza o texto que desexa buscar ou seleccione unha entrada de texto da lista.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 22 Engade esta páxina aos marcadores
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL 6a O panel de navegación da xanela da Axuda contén os separadores Contido, Índice, Localizar e Marcadores.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 30 Localiza a seguinte ocorrencia do termo buscado.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 18 Imprime a páxina actual
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 2f Vai á primeira páxina do tema actual da Axuda
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 31 Abre a caixa de diálogo Localizar nesta páxina.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 1a Avanza á seguinte páxina
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 19 Volve á páxina anterior
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 26 Mostra e oculta o panel de navegación
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 57 A barra de ferramentas contén funcións importantes para o control do sistema da Axuda
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 2d Ofrece unha visión xeral do sistema da Axuda
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 23 Prema para ver o tema seleccionado.
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 54 Prema dúas veces nunha entrada ou teclee a palabra que desexa localizar no índice.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 27 Mostra a entrada seleccionada da lista.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 4b Especifica se a busca dun termo se realiza só nos títulos dos documentos.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS 6b Especifica se vai realizarse unha busca exacta da palabra inserida. Non se localizarán partes de palabras.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 7d Lista os títulos das páxinas localizadas na Busca en todo o texto. Para ver unha páxina prema dúas veces na súa entrada.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 2b Prema para iniciar a busca en todo o texto.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 58 Introduza aquí o termo de busca. A busca non distingue entre maiúsculas e minúsculas.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 1f elimina o marcador seleccionado
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 46 abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode atribuír outro nome ao marcador
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 25 exhibe o asunto seleccionado da Axuda
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS 95 Ao premer na tecla Intro ou dúas veces sobre un marcador ábrese a páxina asignada. Se preme no botón dereito do rato ábrese o menú de contexto.
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE 58 Mostra o nome da páxina marcada. Se o desexa pode teclear un novo nome para o marcador.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS 6e Mostra os temas principais da axuda, organizados de maneira semellante aos cartafoles dun xestor de ficheiros.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 2e Abre a barra de ferramentas Cor de extrusión.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 29 Abre a xanela Iluminación de extrusión.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 1b Seleccione unha dirección.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 27 Abre a xanela Dirección de extrusión.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 29 Abre a xanela Profundidade de extrusión.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 3b Inclina cinco graos cara á dereita o obxecto seleccionado.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 39 Inclina cinco graos cara a arriba o obxecto seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 3c Inclina cinco graos cara á esquerda o obxecto seleccionado.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 39 Inclina cinco graos cara a abaixo o obxecto seleccionado.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 27 Abre a xanela Superficie de extrusión.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 2a Introduza unha profundidade de extrusión.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 3a Activa/desactiva os efectos 3D dos obxectos seleccionados.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 58 Guíano na creación de cartas comerciais e persoais, fax, axendas, presentacións, etc.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 74 O asistente crea un novo modelo de documento a partir das opcións seleccionadas e despois gárdao no disco ríxido.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 39 Garda a configuración actual e pasa á seguinte páxina.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 32 Mostra as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 32 Mostra as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 32 Mostra as seleccións feitas nos pasos anteriores.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 27 Inicia o asistente de modelos de carta.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 27 Inicia o asistente de modelos de carta.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 28 Seleccione o deseño do modelo de carta.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 2f Especifica que se vai crear unha carta persoal.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 36 Especifica que se vai crear unha carta persoal formal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER a2 Especifica se vai usarse papel con logotipos impresos, enderezos ou liñas de pés de páxina. O asistente mostra a seguir a páxina de deseño do papel timbrado.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 39 Especifica que se vai crear un modelo de carta comercial.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 3b Especifica se se vai crear unha carta persoal ou comercial.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 74 Introduza a altura da área do pé de páxina xa impreso no seu papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime nesa área.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER a7 Especifica que o enderezo xa está impreso en tamaño reducido por enriba da área do enderezo do destinatario. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime enderezos en tamaño reducido.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 66 Especifica a existencia dun enderezo xa impreso no papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime enderezos.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 4d Define a distancia entre o logotipo e a marxes esquerda e dereita da páxina.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 4d Define a distancia entre o logotipo e a marxes esquerda e dereita da páxina.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 1d Define a largura do logotipo.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 1d Define a largura do logotipo.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 4f Define a distancia entre o logotipo e as marxes superior e inferior da páxina.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 1c Define a altura do logotipo.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6c Especifica que xa hai un pé de páxina impreso no papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime pés de páxina.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 4f Define a distancia entre o logotipo e as marxes superior e inferior da páxina.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 1c Define a altura do logotipo.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 67 Especifica que xa hai un logotipo impreso no seu papel timbrado. %PRODUCTNAME non imprime ningún logo.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 45 Permítelle especificar os elementos presentes no seu papel timbrado.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 2d Inclúe un pé de páxina no modelo de carta.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 53 Inclúe unha frase de despedida no modelo de carta. Selecciónea na caixa de lista.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 53 Inclúe unha frase de despedida no modelo de carta. Selecciónea na caixa de lista.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Inclúe marcas de dobra no modelo de carta.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 45 Inclúe un saúdo no modelo de carta, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 45 Inclúe un saúdo no modelo de carta, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 30 Inclúe unha liña de asunto no modelo de carta.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4d Inclúe unha liña con referencias a unha carta comercial no modelo de carta.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Inclúe un enderezo de remite en pequeno no modelo de carta.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Inclúe un logotipo no modelo de carta.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 2a Define o texto e a posición do remitente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 52 Especifica que se insiran os campos de marcadores de posición no modelo de carta.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 2d Especifica os datos de enderezo do remitente.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 2d Especifica os datos de enderezo do remitente.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 46 Os campos de base de datos de enderezos insírense no modelo de carta.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 2d Especifica os datos de enderezo do remitente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Especifica o enderezo da rúa do remitente.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 1f Especifica o nome do remitente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Utiliza os datos de enderezo das seguintes caixas de texto.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 4d Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Define os datos do destinatario e do remitente.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 60 Marque esta caixa de verificación se desexa incluír os números de páxina no modelo de carta.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 4b Seleccione esta opción para suprimir o pé de páxina da primeira páxina.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 2f Introduza o texto das liñas de pé de páxina.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 48 Especifica os elementos que se van incluír no espazo do pé de páxina.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 2d Garda o modelo e manteno aberto para editalo.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 59 Garda e pecha o modelo e, a seguir, abre un novo documento sen título baseado no modelo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 5d Introduza o camiño e o nome do ficheiro do modelo ou prema no botón ... para seleccionalos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2c Especifica o título do modelo de documento.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 5d Introduza o camiño e o nome do ficheiro do modelo ou prema no botón ... para seleccionalos.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 38 Especifica onde e baixo que nome se vai gardar o modelo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 7e O asistente garda a configuración e avanza á seguinte páxina. O botón Seguinte fica inactivo ao chegar á última páxina.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE bd O asistente crea un modelo de documento a partir das opcións seleccionadas e gárdao. Móstrase na área de traballo un novo documento baseado no modelo, co nome de ficheiro "SentítuloX".
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 18 Abre o Asistente de fax.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK b1 Prema no botón Volver para ver o configurado na páxina anterior. A configuración actual non se modifica nin elimina. Este botón móstrase activo a partir da segunda páxina.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 18 Abre o Asistente de fax.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 21 Especifica o deseño predefinido.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 28 Crea un modelo de fax de estilo persoal.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 21 Especifica o deseño predefinido.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 2a Crea un modelo de fax de estilo comercial.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 28 Define o estilo do seu documento de fax.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 1a Inclúe un pé de páxina.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 32 Inclúe un saúdo. Seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 32 Inclúe un saúdo. Seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 1d Inclúe unha liña de asunto.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Inclúe unha liña de tipo de mensaxe, selecciónea na caixa de lista.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Inclúe unha liña de tipo de mensaxe, selecciónea na caixa de lista.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 1a Inclúe un campo de datos.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 1f Inclúe un logotipo da empresa.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 4b Inclúe unha fórmula cordial de despedida, seleccióneo na caixa de lista.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 2f Especifica os elementos do fax que se imprimen.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 67 Insire campos de base de datos para unha posterior combinación de correspondencia co documento de fax.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 72 Insire marcadores de posición para o enderezo no modelo de fax, onde, máis adiante, introducirá os datos reais.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 8b Seleccióneo para introducir os datos de enderezo nas caixas de texto presentes. Os datos insírense como texto normal no documento de fax.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 2c Introduza os datos do enderezo do remitente.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 72 Insire marcadores de posición para o enderezo no modelo de fax, onde, máis adiante, introducirá os datos reais.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 40 Especifica a información do remitente e do destinatario do fax.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 2c Especifica a información do pé de páxina.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 28 Define o nome e localización do modelo.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 3c Inicia o asistente para axudalo a crear un modelo de axenda.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 3c Inicia o asistente para axudalo a crear un modelo de axenda.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 53 Imprime unha páxina que pode utilizarse para redactar as actas durante a reunión.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 32 Seleccione o deseño de páxina na caixa de lista.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 24 Especifica un deseño para a axenda.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 1f Especifica o sitio de reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 1e Especifica a hora da reunión.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 1e Especifica o nome da reunión.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 1e Especifica a data da reunión.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3a Especifica a data, hora, nome e localización da reunión.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 37 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Notas".
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 44 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Material necesario".
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 3a Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Lecturas".
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 42 Especifica se é necesario imprimir unha liña "Tipo de reunión".
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 35 Especifica os títulos que desexa incluír na axenda.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 5c Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os participantes na reunión.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 4f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña para introducir os observadores.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 6f Especifica se é necesario incluír unha liña que permita introducir o nome da persoa que convocou a reunión.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 32 Especifica os nomes que se van incluír na axenda.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 21 Move cara a arriba o tema actual.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1f Elimina a liña de tema actual.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Move cara a abaixo o tema actual.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 38 Insire unha nova liña baleira de tema enriba da actual.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 58 Introduza os temas da axenda. Use os botóns Mover arriba e Mover abaixo para ordenalos.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3c Especifica os temas que desexa imprimir no modelo de axenda.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 41 Crea e garda o modelo de axenda e, a seguir, ábreo para editalo.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5a Crea e garda o modelo de axenda e, a seguir, abre un novo documento de axenda baseado nel.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 51 Especifique o camiño completo, incluído o nome de ficheiro do modelo de axenda.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 51 Especifique o camiño completo, incluído o nome de ficheiro do modelo de axenda.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 26 Especifica o nome do modelo de axenda.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 37 Escolla o nome e localización para o modelo de axenda.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 38 Acepta a nova configuración e pasa á seguinte páxina.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 3d Volve á etapa anterior sen eliminar a configuración actual.
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 8e Use o asistente para crear presentacións de modo interactivo. Co asistente pode modificar as mostras de modelos segundo as súas necesidades.
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 8e Use o asistente para crear presentacións de modo interactivo. Co asistente pode modificar as mostras de modelos segundo as súas necesidades.
c slot%3A10425 8e Use o asistente para crear presentacións de modo interactivo. Co asistente pode modificar as mostras de modelos segundo as súas necesidades.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 44 Especifica que se mostren os modelos na xanela de previsualización.
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 108 Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialog box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 46 Prema en Abrir para ver a caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiro.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 3a Exhibe unha lista de presentacións creadas anteriormente.
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 41 Lista as categorías de modelo dispoñíbeis para presentacións.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 41 Lista as categorías de modelo dispoñíbeis para presentacións.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 49 Abre unha caixa de lista que contén varias presentacións modificábeis.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 27 Crea unha nova presentación (baleira).
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 47 Especifica o tipo de presentación e permítelle seleccionar un modelo.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 34 Crea unha presentación para usala como diapositiva.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 31 Crea só unha presentación de pantalla completa.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 35 Crea unha presentación que pode imprimirse en papel.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 30 Utiliza o formato orixinal de páxina do modelo.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 36 Crea unha presentación para usala como transparencia.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 6d Permítelle seleccionar un estilo de diapositiva para a presentación seleccionada na páxina 1 do asistente.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 6d Permítelle seleccionar un estilo de diapositiva para a presentación seleccionada na páxina 1 do asistente.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 6d Permítelle seleccionar un estilo de diapositiva para a presentación seleccionada na páxina 1 do asistente.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 2c Defines the pause between each presentation.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 2f Defines the duration of each presentation page.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 60 The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 5f Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1c Determines the effect speed.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 2a Specifies an effect for your presentation.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 46 Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 64 Utilice este campo para introducir outras ideas e puntos que lle gustaría abordar na presentación.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 23 Especifica o tema da presentación.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 2f Especifica o seu nome e o nome de súa empresa.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 2f Especifica o seu nome e o nome de súa empresa.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 35 Crea un resumo do contido de todas as presentacións.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 35 Crea un resumo do contido de todas as presentacións.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 31 Prema para crear formularios sen máis preguntas.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 33 Activa o asistente para a creación de formularios.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 32 Mostra os campos dispoñíbeis no novo formulario.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a abaixo o campo seleccionado na lista.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 45 Especifica a táboa ou consulta para a que desexa crear o formulario.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 4a Prema para mover unha entrada cara a arriba o campo seleccionado na lista.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 4e Prema para engadir un subformulario baseado nunha selección manual de campos.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 37 Seleccione a relación en que se basea o subformulario.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 46 Prema para engadir un subformulario baseado nunha relación existente.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 36 Seleccione esta opción para engadir un subformulario.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Mostra os campos que se van incluír no novo formulario.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 43 Especifica a táboa ou consulta para a que se crea o subformulario.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 80 Seleccione o campo de formulario principal asociado ao campo do subformulario, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 80 Seleccione o campo de subformulario asociado co campo do formulario principal, que pode seleccionar na caixa de lista adxacente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 36 Dispón as etiquetas enriba dos datos correspondentes.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 33 Aliña os campos da base de datos de forma tabular.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 59 Aliña os campos da base de datos en forma de columnas, coas etiquetas enriba dos campos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 5e Aliña os campos da base de datos en forma de columnas, coas etiquetas á esquerda dos campos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 23 As etiquetas alíñanse á dereita.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 24 As etiquetas alíñanse á esquerda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 42 Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a inclusión de datos novos.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 3e Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a eliminación de datos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 68 Crea un formulario que pode usarse tanto para mostrar datos existentes como para introducir datos novos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 3a Seleccione esta opción para prohibir a edición de datos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 3e Crea un formulario que só se usa para introducir datos novos.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2f Especifica que os bordos do campo sexan planos.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 3b Especifica que os bordos do campo teñan unha aparencia 3D.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 2b Especifica que os campos non teñan bordos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 2d Especifica o estilo de páxina do formulario.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 44 Garda o formulario e ábreo en modo edición para cambiar o deseño.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 5c Garda o formulario e ábreo como documento de formulario para introducir e visualizar datos.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 20 Especifica o nome do formulario.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 25 Seleccione as propiedades do informe.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 30 Activa o asistente para a creación de informes.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 2c Mostra os campos incluídos no novo informe.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 3f Seleccione a táboa ou consulta para a que vai crear o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 8d Mostra os nomes dos campos que van incluírse no informe. Pode introducir á dereita unha etiqueta para cada campo que se imprime no informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST cb Lista os campos utilizados para agrupar o informe. Para eliminar un nivel do agrupamento, seleccione o nome do campo e, a seguir, prema no botón <-. Pódense seleccionar ata catro niveis de agrupamento.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING d8 Lista os campos seleccionados na páxina anterior do asistente. Para agrupar o informe partindo dun campo, seleccione o nome do campo e, a seguir, prema no botón ->. Pode seleccionar ata catro niveis de agrupamento.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2e Ordena o contido do campo de modo descendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2d Ordena o contido do campo de modo ascendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 35 Seleccione un campo adicional para ordenar o informe.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 41 Seleccione o primeiro campo que se usará para ordenar o informe.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 40 Selecciona unha páxina de orientación vertical para o informe.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 42 Selecciona unha páxina de orientación horizontal para o informe.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT b1 Define un deseño de páxina para o informe. Os deseños de páxina cárganse a partir de ficheiros modelo, que atribúen unha cabeceira, un pé de páxina e o fondo da páxina.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 74 Define un conxunto de estilos para o informe. Os estilos atribúen tipos de letra, sangrías, fondos de táboa, etc.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 26 Se preme en Rematar o modelo gárdase.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 3e Se preme en Rematar o modelo gárdase e ábrese para edición.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 4d Garda o informe como modelo. Os informes dinámicos mostran os datos actuais.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 6a Garda o informe como estático. Se o abre, mostra sempre os mesmos datos que no momento da súa creación.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 48 Especifica o título que se imprime na liña de título de cada páxina.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 34 Elimina o deseño seleccionado da lista de deseños.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 1e Mostra os deseños existentes.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 77 Carga un deseño existente da lista de deseños e utilízao como punto de partida para os pasos seguintes do asistente.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 34 Crea un deseño nas páxinas seguintes do asistente.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 34 Crea un deseño nas páxinas seguintes do asistente.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 45 Especifica o URL (absoluto ou relativo) para as scripts Perl xeradas.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 5f Especifica o URL (absoluto ou relativo) que debe introducir o usuario para ver a presentación.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 63 Especifica o URL (absoluto ou relativo) onde se gardou a presentación HTML creada no servidor web.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 4c Utilizado pola exportación WebCast para crear páxinas HTML e scripts Perl.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 32 Define o tempo de exhibición de cada diapositiva.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 73 A transición de páxinas faise automaticamente tras o tempo especificado e non depende do contido da presentación
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT dd A transición da diapositiva depende do intervalo que defina na presentación para cada diapositiva. Se define unha transición manual de páxina, a presentación HTML introduce unha nova páxina ao premer calquera tecla.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 99 Crea unha presentación HTML predefinida como unha exportación de quiosco, en que as diapositivas avanzan automaticamente despois dun tempo determinado.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP a5 Se selecciona a opción ASP , a exportación WebCast crea páxinas ASP. Teña en conta que as presentacións HTML só as ofrecen servidores web con soporte para ASP.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 30 Especifica que se mostren tamén as súas notas.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 23 Crea unha portada para o documento.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 5c Reinicia automaticamente a presentación HTML despois da exhibición da última diapositiva.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES 9c Crea páxinas HTML estándar con marcos. A páxina exportada sitúase no marco principal e o marco da esquerda mostra un índice en forma de hiperligazóns.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 42 Crea páxinas HTML estándar a partir de páxinas de exportación.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 42 Crea páxinas HTML estándar a partir de páxinas de exportación.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 51 Indica que se exportan os ficheiros de son definidos como efectos de transición.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 4d Seleccione unha resolución media para unha presentación de tamaño mediano.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 5b Seleccione unha resolución alta para unha visualización de diapositivas de alta calidade.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 80 Seleccione unha resolución baixa para manter o tamaño de ficheiro reducido, mesmo para presentacións con moitas diapositivas.
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY b4 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 82 The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 75 The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 79 The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 3b Especifica o texto adicional que se vai mostrar na portada.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 46 Especifica o seu sitio web. Insire unha hiperligazón na publicación.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 2d Especifica o enderezo de correo electrónico.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 2b Especifica o nome do autor da publicación.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 2b Especifica o nome do autor da publicación.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 31 Insire hiperligazóns de texto en vez de botóns.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 31 Insire hiperligazóns de texto en vez de botóns.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 54 Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor de fondo da presentación.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 60 Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor da ligazón visitada da presentación.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 5e Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor da ligazón activa da presentación.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 5c Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor, onde pode seleccionar a cor da hiperligazón da presentación.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 55 Abre a caixa de diálogo Cor , onde pode seleccionar a cor do texto da presentación.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 3b Utiliza as cores predefinidas do explorador web do usuario.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 4e Permite definir as súas propias cores nalgúns dos obxectos da presentación.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 47 Determina as cores a partir dos estilos utilizados no documento actual.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 47 Determina as cores a partir dos estilos utilizados no documento actual.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 53 Copia e converte documentos ao formato XML de OpenDocument usado por $[officename].
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 5a Crea un ficheiro de rexistro no cartafol de traballo que mostra os documentos convertidos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 61 Converte documentos en formato *.ppt de Microsoft PowerPoint en documentos *.odp de OpenDocument.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 5c Converte documentos en formato *.xls de Microsoft Excel en documentos *.ods de OpenDocument.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 5b Converte documentos en formato *.doc de Microsoft Word en documentos *.odt de OpenDocument.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 5b Converte documentos en formato *.doc de Microsoft Word en documentos *.odt de OpenDocument.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 2a Opens a dialog to select the desired path.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 33 Mostra os intervalos da lista que se van converter.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 39 Convértense todas as celas de moeda do documento activo.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 2f Convértense as celas de moeda da folla activa.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 2d Convértense as celas co estilo seleccionado.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 31 Especifica a moeda que desexa converter en euros.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 94 Converte en euros os valores monetarios encontrados en documentos de $[officename] Calc e en campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT c0 Especifica que durante a conversión se desactiva a protección da folla e que se reactiva despois. Se a folla está protexida cun contrasinal, aparece unha caixa de diálogo para introducilo.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 66 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode seleccionar un cartafol para almacenar os ficheiros convertidos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 15 Inicia a conversión.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1b Pecha o Conversor de euros.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 47 Especifica o cartafol e o camiño onde gardar os ficheiros convertidos.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Volve á primeira páxina do Conversor de euros.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 47 Especifica se incluír todos os subcartafoles do cartafol seleccionado.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 24 Activa a axuda da caixa de diálogo.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 56 Converte valores monetarios de campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 94 Converte en euros os valores monetarios encontrados en documentos de $[officename] Calc e en campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6d Converte todos os documentos e modelos de $[officename] Calc e $[officename] Writer no cartafol seleccionado.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 4e Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar o cartafol ou documento desexado.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 3e Indica o cartafol ou o nome do documento que desexa converter.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 56 Convértense as celas de moeda do intervalo seleccionado antes de activar o conversor.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1a Converte todo o documento.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 94 Converte en euros os valores monetarios encontrados en documentos de $[officename] Calc e en campos e táboas de documentos de $[officename] Writer.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 46 Estabelece a conexión coa fonte de datos e pecha a caixa de diálogo.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 6b Seleccione esta opción se desexa rexistrar outra fonte de datos como axenda de enderezos en $[officename].
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 56 Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Mozilla ou Netscape.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 56 Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Mozilla ou Netscape.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa dispón de datos de enderezos nun servidor LDAP.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 56 Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Mozilla ou Netscape.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 2c Sae do asistente sen aplicar ningún cambio.
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 4e Seleccione esta opción se xa utiliza unha axenda de enderezos en Thunderbird.
c slot%3A10934 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 60 Este asistente rexistra unha axenda de enderezos existente como fonte de datos en $[officename].
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 47 Abre unha caixa de diálogo en que pode configurar opcións adicionais.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 5b Especifica a táboa que vai servir de axenda de enderezos para os modelos de $[officename].
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS fe Rexistra en %PRODUCTNAME o ficheiro de base de datos recén creado. A base de datos inclúese na xanela da fonte de datos (F4). Se esta caixa de verificación está desmarcada, só é posíbel acceder á base de datos abrindo o ficheiro de base de datos.
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 24 Especifica o nome da fonte de datos.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 47 Especifica a localización mediante unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 47 Especifica a localización mediante unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiro.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 33 Abre a Modelos: Atribución de axenda de enderezos.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 4a O Asistente de web axúdao a manter un sitio web nun servidor da internet.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 4a O Asistente de web axúdao a manter un sitio web nun servidor da internet.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 26 Elimina a configuración seleccionada.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7f Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "default".
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 91 Introduza o título do documento seleccionado. O título aparece como hiperligazón ao documento seleccionado na páxina de índice do sitio web.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 51 Selecccione o formato de ficheiro ao que desexa exportar o ficheiro seleccionado.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 34 Introduza o nome do autor do documento seleccionado.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 29 Elimina da lista o ficheiro seleccionado.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC dd Opens a dialog where you can select the files that you want to upload to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 39 Introduza unha descrición para o documento seleccionado.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS ff Lista os documentos escollidos para seren publicados no sitio web. O asistente pode converter documentos de %PRODUCTNAME en formatos HTML, PDF e, nalgúns casos, a formato Flash, antes de cargalos. Os ficheiros restantes cárganse no seu formato orixinal.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 2f Seleccione o deseño para a páxina de índice.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 4b Optimiza o sitio web para unha resolución de pantalla de 800x600 píxeles.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 4b Optimiza o sitio web para unha resolución de pantalla de 640x480 píxeles.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 44 Mostra o número de páxinas do seu sitio web na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 3c Mostra a icona do formato de ficheiro na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 35 Mostra o formato dos ficheiros na páxina de índice.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 4a Inclúe a data da última modificación do ficheiro na páxina de índice.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 43 Inclúe as datas de creación dos documentos na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 4c Optimiza o sitio web para unha resolución de pantalla de 1024x768 píxeles.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 41 Mostra o tamaño do ficheiro en quilobytes na páxina de índice.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 4d Inclúe os nomes das persoas que crearon os documentos na páxina de índice.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 46 Inclúe a información de resumo dos documentos na páxina de índice.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 43 Inclúe os nomes de ficheiros dos documentos na páxina de índice.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 5c Seleccione as iconas que desexa usar para os elementos de navegación da páxina de índice.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 39 Seleccione unha Imaxe de fondo para a páxina de índice.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 38 Seleccione o esquema de cores para a páxina de índice.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 2d Limpa a imaxe de fondo da páxina de índice.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 72 Abre unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros para seleccionar un ficheiro de imaxe de fondo para a páxina de índice.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 42 Especifique unha imaxe de fondo para o estilo de Asistente de web.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 31 Limpa o conxunto de iconas da páxina de índice.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 53 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentation documents in the Web Wizard.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 78 Introduza a nota sobre os dereitos de autor para a páxina de índice. A nota está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 78 Introduza o enderezo de correo electrónico da páxina de índice. O enderezo está almacenado nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 64 Introduza a data modificada da páxina de índice. A data está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 6e Introduza unha descrición para a páxina de índice. A descrición está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 66 Introduza a data de creación da páxina de índice. A data está almacenada nunha etiqueta meta HTML.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 6f Introduza o título da páxina de índice. Este elemento móstrase na barra de título dos exploradores da web.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP d3 Carga os ficheiros nun servidor FTP. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 2f Introduza o nome do ficheiro de configuración.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 57 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode especificar a localización do ficheiro de datos.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 11c Engade a páxina de índice e os ficheiros a un ficheiro de datos comprimido e carga o ficheiro no sitio web. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 11c Engade a páxina de índice e os ficheiros a un ficheiro de datos comprimido e carga o ficheiro no sitio web. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL ec Carga a páxina de índice e os ficheiros nun cartafol local. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 74 Abre a caixa de diálogo Conexión FTP, onde pode editar e probar a configuración da conexión para o servidor FTP.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP d3 Carga os ficheiros nun servidor FTP. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 39 Abre unha caixa de diálogo para seleccionar un cartafol.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL ec Carga a páxina de índice e os ficheiros nun cartafol local. A páxina de índice gárdase na localización especificada. Os ficheiros restantes gárdanse no cartafol "omeusitioweb", dentro do cartafol que contén a páxina de índice.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 37 Garda a configuración que especificou neste asistente.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 4d Abre a páxina web no explorador da web predefinido do seu sistema operativo.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 69 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode especificar o cartafol do servidor FTP para almacenar os ficheiros.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 5f Introduza a localización dun cartafol no servidor FTP onde desexe almacenar os seus ficheiros.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 30 Proba a conexión FTP coa configuración actual.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3c Teclee o contrasinal necesario para acceder ao servidor FTP.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 40 Teclee o nome de usuario necesario para acceder ao servidor FTP.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2d Teclee o nome ou enderezo IP do servidor FTP.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 50 Edite e probe a configuración de conexión do servidor FTP do Asistente de web.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 39 Seleccione aquí unha función para executar na consulta.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 44 Se marca un campo de datos como Visíbel, faise visíbel na consulta
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 66 If you click the cell, you can select among the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 49 Aquí móstrase a táboa de base de datos do campo de datos seleccionado.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 91 Introduza o nome do campo de datos a que fixo referencia na consulta. A configuración estabelecida nas filas inferiores refírese  a este campo.
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 3c Introduza o nome de consulta ou de visualización de táboa.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 41 Especifica os criterios de filtraxe do contido do campo de datos.
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 53 Introduza o nome do esquema atribuído á consulta ou á visualización de táboas.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 15 Edit Join Properties.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 90 Especifica un alcume, que se lista nunha consulta en vez do nome de campo. Isto posibilita o uso de etiquetas de columna definidas polo usuario.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 32 Seleccione as condicións para definir a consulta.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 65 Prema dúas veces nos campos para engadilos á consulta. Arrastre e solte para definir as relacións.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 2d Specifies the link type of the selected link.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 2f Especifica as dúas táboas que desexa asociar.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 2f Especifica as dúas táboas que desexa asociar.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 1d Introduza o novo contrasinal.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 21 Introduza o contrasinal anterior.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 24 Teclee outra vez o novo contrasinal.
1c sfx%2Fui%2Fpassword%2Fusered 22 Especifica o nome do novo usuario.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 1a Mostra os textos de axuda.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Mostra o código de formato que pode seleccionar co botón ... ).
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Especifica o valor predefinido dos novos rexistros de datos.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 67 Se esta orde presenta unha marca de verificación, o campo de datos desta liña é unha chave primaria.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 97 Se a táboa non foi gravada insere unha fila baleira por riba da fila actual . Se a táboa xa está gravada insere unha fila baleira na fin da táboa .
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 1b Especifica o tipo de campo.
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 36 Este botón abre a caixa de diálogo Formato de campo.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 25 Especifica unha descrición opcional.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 93 Especifica o nome do campo de datos. Teña en conta as restricións da base de datos, como o tamaño do nome, os caracteres especiais e os espazos.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 29 Nesta área define a estrutura da táboa.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 12 Closes the dialog.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 57 Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 50 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialog was started.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Renames the current index.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 14 Creates a new index.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Deletes the current index.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST 85 Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialog.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 4a The Index Design dialog allows you edit the indexes for the current table.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 59 Aquí pode ligar as táboas da base de datos actual por medio de campos de datos comúns.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 58 Os nomes das táboas seleccionadas para a ligazón aparecen aquí como nomes de columna.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 58 Os nomes das táboas seleccionadas para a ligazón aparecen aquí como nomes de columna.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 27 Define os campos de chave da relación.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Permite definir e editar unha relación entre dúas táboas.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 41 Especifica o nome da chave primaria xerada. Ese nome é opcional.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 39 Anexa os datos da táboa que desexa copiar noutra táboa.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW d8 Se a base de datos soporta visualizacións, só pode seleccionar esta opción ao copiar unha consulta nun depósito de táboa. Esta opción permítelle ver e editar unha consulta como visualización normal de táboa.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 40 Só copia a definición da táboa, non os datos correspondentes.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 1e Crea unha copia 1:1 da táboa.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 1b Especifica o nome da copia.
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 36 Lista os campos que desexa incluír na táboa copiada.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES bc Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 24 Activa o recoñecemento automático.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 50 Introduza o número de liñas que desexa usar para o recoñecemento automático.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 31 Seleccione o valor predefinido dos campos Si/Non.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 83 Introduza o número de decimais do campo de datos. Esta opción só está dispoñíbel para campos de datos numéricos ou decimais.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 34 Introduza o número de caracteres do campo de datos.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 1c Selecciona un tipo de campo.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 34 Introduza o número de caracteres do campo de datos.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 58 Mostra o nome do campo de datos seleccionado. Se o desexa, pode introducir un novo nome.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3d Lista os campos de datos que se incluirán na táboa copiada.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 2a Limpa as caixas de verificación da lista.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 2d Selecciona todos os campos de datos da lista.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 39 A entrada seleccionada descende unha posición na lista..
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 39 A entrada seleccionada descende unha posición na lista..
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 37 A entrada seleccionada ascende unha posición na lista.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 37 A entrada seleccionada ascende unha posición na lista.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN 9b Lista os campos de datos posíbeis na táboa de destino. Na táboa de destino só se inclúen os campos de datos seleccionados na lista da táboa de orixe.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 155 Lista os campos de datos da táboa fonte. Para incluír un deses campos na táboa de destino, marque a caixa de verificación situada diante do nome do campo de datos. Para atribuír o contido dun campo de datos da táboa fonte a un campo de datos da táboa de destino, prema no campo na lista da táboa fonte e, a seguir, nunha das frechas.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b2 Uses the current data source of the Catalog. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box clear.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 6d Nas fontes de datos, só permite nomes con caracteres que se axusten ás restricións de nomeamento de SQL92.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 7c Introduza unha instrución SQL que devolva o último valor incrementado automaticamente do campo de datos de chave primaria.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 72 Introduza a orde SQL que indica á fonte de datos o incremento automático do campo de datos INTEGER especificado.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 75 Permite a $[officename] soportar campos de datos incrementados automaticamente na fonte de datos ODBC ou JDBC actual.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 52 Use este campo de texto se necesita configurar opcións adicionais do controlador.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 61 Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 91 Mostra os rexistros dun ficheiro, incluíndo os marcados como eliminados. Se selecciona esta caixa de verificación, non pode eliminar rexistros.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 41 Move todos os índices de táboa á lista Índices dispoñíbeis.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 49 Move os índices de táboa seleccionados á lista Índices dispoñíbeis.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 41 Move todos os índices dispoñíbeis á lista Índices de táboa.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 38 Move o índice seleccionado á lista Índices de táboa.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 41 Lista os índices dispoñíbeis que pode atribuír a unha táboa.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 42 Lista os índices actuais da táboa de base de datos seleccionada.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 38 Seleccione a táboa de base de datos que desexa indexar.
29 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fexecute 3d Executa a orde introducido na caixa Orde que será executada.
2c dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsqlhistory 6d Lista os ordes SQL executados anteriormente. Para executar de novo unha orde prema nel e despois en Executar.
25 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fsql 3c Introduza a orde de administración SQL que desexa executar.
28 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2Fstatus 41 Mostra os resultados, incluíndo os erros, da orde SQL executado.
31 dbaccess%2Fui%2Fdirectsqldialog%2FDirectSQLDialog 64 Abre unha caixa de diálogo onde pode introducir ordes SQL para a administración de bases de datos.
d .uno%3ASortup 5f Ordena de maneira ascendente a lista de nomes de táboas, comezando polo principio do alfabeto.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 123 Algunhas bases de datos rastrexan os cambios realizados en cada rexistro a través da atribución de números de versión aos campos alterados. Cada vez que se altera un campo, o número increméntase unha unidade. Mostra na táboa de base de datos o número de versión interno do rexistro.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 57 Mostra e permite editar os dereitos de acceso á base de datos do usuario seleccionado.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 1f Elimina o usuario seleccionado.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 45 Cambia o contrasinal do usuario actual para acceder á base de datos.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 42 Engade un novo usuario para acceder á base de datos seleccionada.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 3a Seleccione o usuario cuxa configuración desexa modificar.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 50 Mostra a cantidade de espazo libre (en megabytes) dispoñíbel na base de datos.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 37 Mostra o tamaño total (en megabytes) da base de datos.
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 39 Mostra a porcentaxe de espazo utilizado da base de datos.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 33 Mostra o camiño e o nome do ficheiro DATADEVSPACE.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 35 Mostra o camiño e o nome do ficheiro TRANSACTIONLOG.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 32 Mostra o camiño e o nome do ficheiro SYSDEVSPACE.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 34 Introduza en megabytes o tamaño da caché de datos.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 3d Introduza en megabytes o tamaño do ficheiro de transacción.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 58 Introduza aquí o tamaño en megabytes da base de datos. O tamaño máximo é de 100 MB.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 47 Localice o cartafol en que desexa gardar o ficheiro e prema en Aceptar.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 29 Introduza o camiño do DEVSPACE de datos.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 3c Introduza o camiño do ficheiro de rexistro da transacción.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 47 Localice o cartafol en que desexa gardar o ficheiro e prema en Aceptar.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 28 Introduza o camiño do sistema DEVSPACE.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 47 Localice o cartafol en que desexa gardar o ficheiro e prema en Aceptar.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 19 Introduza un contrasinal.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD 19 Introduza un contrasinal.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD 19 Introduza un contrasinal.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a7 Teclee o nome do usuario de dominio usado internamente por Adabas. Normalmente, a configuración predefinida do nome e contrasinal do usuario de dominio non se altera.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 33 Introduza o nome do administrador da base de datos.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR e6 Introduza o nome do usuario a que desexa conceder un control limitado para a modificación dalgúns parámetros da base de datos. Normalmente, a configuración predefinida do nome e contrasinal do usuario de control non se altera.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1f Teclee o nome da base de datos.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 60 Seleccione esta opción para usar como chave primaria un campo existente con valores exclusivos.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Crea un índice con instrucións ASC ou DESC.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 3b Permite utilizar o nome do esquema nas instrucións SELECT.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 4c Mostra o número de versión interna do rexistro na táboa da base de datos.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 4a Ignora privilexios de acceso fornecidos polo controlador da base de datos.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 28 Introduza o nome da fonte de datos ODBC.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3f Seleccione o tipo de comparación booleana que desexa utilizar.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 59 Uso de secuencias de escape para asociacións externas. A súa sintaxe é {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 3c Anexiona o alcume ao nome da táboa nas instrucións SELECT.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 5a Substitúe por un punto de interrogación (?) os parámetros nomeados nas fontes de datos.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 82 Seleccione para usar o código CR + LF  para finalizar cada liña de texto (preferentemente en sistemas operativos DOS e Windows).
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 65 Seleccione o conxunto de caracteres que desexa usar para visualizar a base de datos en $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 3c Seleccione o tipo de base de datos co cal desexa conectarse.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 4a Proba a conexión da base de datos a través da clase de controlador JDBC.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 5b Se está marcada, o usuario deberá introducir o contrasinal para acceder á base de datos.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 59 Introduza o camiño ao documento de folla de cálculo que desexa usar como base de datos.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 47 Introduza o nome do controlador JDBC que se conecta coa fonte de datos.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 22 Introduza o nome da base de datos.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 42 Introduza o camiño ao cartafol que contén os ficheiros de texto.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 3d Proba a conexión da base de datos coa configuración actual.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3f Introduza o camiño do cartafol que contén os ficheiros dBASE.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 6e O asistente da base de datos crea un ficheiro de base de datos que contén información sobre a base de datos.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 52 Seleccione o tipo de base de datos para a conexión con bases de datos existentes.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 6e Seleccione esta opción para crear documentos de base de datos para a conexión con bases de datos existentes.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST a0 Seleccione da lista de ficheiros utilizados recentemente un ficheiro de base de datos para o abrir. Prema en Rematar para abrir o ficheiro e saír do asistente.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT b2 Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiro onde pode seleccionar un ficheiro de base de datos. Prema en Abrir ou en Aceptar para abrir o ficheiro e saír do asistente.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC a6 Seleccione esta opción para abrir un ficheiro de base de datos dunha lista de ficheiros utilizados recentemente ou dunha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiro.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 3b Seleccione esta opción para crear unha nova base de datos.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 73 Seleccione esta opción para chamar o asistente de táboas despois da finalización do asistente de bases de datos.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 5e Seleccione esta opción para mostrar o ficheiro onde pode editar a estrutura da base de datos.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 6f Seleccioe esta opción para manter a información da base de datos tan só no ficheiro de base de datos creado.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 118 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Fields - Other) or in a mail merge.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 32 Especifica o camiño do ficheiro de base de datos.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 2e Introduza o nome do ficheiro de base de datos.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 32 Os contrasinais deben ter entre 3 e 18 caracteres.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 3a Os nomes de usuario poden ter un máximo de 18 caracteres.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 47 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de base de datos.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 22 Introduza o URL da fonte de datos.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 35 Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de camiño.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 31 Introduza o camiño do ficheiro da base de datos.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 25 Introduza o nome do controlador JDBC.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT f1 Introduza o URL da base de datos. Por exemplo, para o controlador JDBC para MySQL, introduza "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>. Para obter máis información sobre o controlador JDBC, consulte a documentación do controlador.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL f1 Introduza o URL da base de datos. Por exemplo, para o controlador JDBC para MySQL, introduza "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>. Para obter máis información sobre o controlador JDBC, consulte a documentación do controlador.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 47 nomeservidor é o nome do computador que executa a base de datos MySQL.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 54 Crea unha conexión segura co servidor LDAP a través de SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 39 Introduza o porto do servidor LDAP. Normalmente é o 389.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 39 Introduza o porto do servidor LDAP. Normalmente é o 389.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 52 Introduza o punto de inicio da busca da base de datos LDAP, por exemplo, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 52 Introduza o punto de inicio da busca da base de datos LDAP, por exemplo, "dc=com".
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 49 Introduza o nome do servidor LDAP utilizando o formato "ldap.server.com".
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 49 Introduza o nome do servidor LDAP utilizando o formato "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 40 Conecta con fontes de datos JDBC definidas nun nivel do sistema.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 40 Conecta con fontes de datos ODBC definidas nun nivel do sistema.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 4d Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de fonte de datos ODBC:
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 31 Introduza o camiño do ficheiro da base de datos.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 3a Introduza o número de porto do servidor da base de datos.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 2d Introduza o URL do servidor da base de datos.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 29 Introduza o nome da base de datos Oracle.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 5f Seleccione esta opción para solicitar un contrasinal ao usuario do documento de base de datos.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 3c Introduce o nome e camiño do ficheiro de folla de cálculo.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 86 Introduza ou seleccione o carácter usado como separador decimal no ficheiro de texto; por exemplo, un punto (0.5) ou unha coma (0,5).
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 5b Introduza ou seleccione o carácter de separación de campos de datos do ficheiro de texto.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 86 Introduza ou seleccione o carácter usado como separador de millares no ficheiro de texto; por exemplo, coma (1,000) ou punto (1.000).
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 5a Prema para acceder aos ficheiros personalizados. Introduza a extensión na caixa de texto.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 25 Prema para acceder aos ficheiros csv.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 25 Prema para acceder aos ficheiros txt.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 43 Prema para abrir unha caixa de diálogo de selección de ficheiros.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 5a Introduza ou seleccione o carácter que identifica un campo de texto no ficheiro de texto.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 5a Prema para acceder aos ficheiros personalizados. Introduza a extensión na caixa de texto.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 108 Introduza o camiño dos ficheiros de texto. Se só quere un ficheiro, use calquera extensión. Se introduce un nome de cartafol, os ficheiros de texto nel incluídos deben ter a extensión *.csv para que sexan recoñecidos como ficheiros da base de datos de texto.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 26 Abre o Asistente de tipo de conexión.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 11 Abre un submenú.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 52 Inicia o Asistente de informes da táboa, consulta ou visualización seleccionada.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 36 Abre a caixa de diálogo Propiedades da base de datos.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 55 Inicia o Asistente de formularios da táboa, consulta ou visualización seleccionada.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView 109 Converte en visualización a consulta seleccionada. A consulta orixinal permanece no ficheiro da base de datos e xérase unha visualización adicional no servidor da base de datos. Debe ter permiso de escritura para engadir unha visualización a unha base de datos.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 32 Abre a caixa de diálogo de Propiedades avanzadas.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 36 Abre o obxecto seleccionado no último estado gardado.
f .uno%3ADBRename 87 Renomea o obxecto seleccionado. Dependendo da base de datos, pode que algúns nomes, caracteres e tamaños de nomes non sexan válidos.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 3f Elimina a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 3f Elimina a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 5b Abre unha xanela na cal pode editar a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 5b Abre unha xanela na cal pode editar a táboa, consulta, formulario ou informe seleccionado.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 99 Exporta o informe seleccionado a un documento de texto. Créase un informe dinámico como copia dos contidos da base de datos no momento da exportación.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail 127 Abre o aplicativo de correo electrónico predefinido para enviar correos electrónicos. O informe seleccionado engádese como anexo. Pode introducir o asunto, os destinatarios e o corpo da mensaxe. No momento da exportación créase un informe dinámico como copia dos contidos da base de datos.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 3c Prema para gardar o formulario no ficheiro de base de datos.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 33 Introduza o nome de ficheiro do formulario gardado.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 36 Prema para subir un nivel na xerarquía de cartafoles.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 3f Prema para crear un novo cartafol no ficheiro da base de datos.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 5d Abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite gardar un novo cartafol no ficheiro de base de datos.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 2a Abre unha nova visualización en modo SQL.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 2e Abre unha nova visualización en modo deseño.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 2b Abre a visualización de deseño de táboa.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 24 Abre unha nova consulta en modo SQL.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 28 Abre unha nova consulta en modo deseño.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 48 Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 2b Abre a visualización de deseño de táboa.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 33 Abre un novo documento de texto en modo formulario.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 46 Abre a caixa de diálogo SQL, na cal pode introducir instrucións SQL.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 7d Abre a caixa de diálogo Filtro de táboa, na cal pode especificar as táboas da base de datos que desexa mostrar ou ocultar.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 7d Abre a caixa de diálogo Filtro de táboa, na cal pode especificar as táboas da base de datos que desexa mostrar ou ocultar.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 5d Abre a caixa de diálogo Administración de usuario, se a base de datos soporta esa función.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 69 Abre a visualización Deseño de relación e verifica se a conexión da base de datos soporta relacións.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Actualiza as táboas.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 41 A previsualización mostra o documento dun formulario ou informe.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 39 Desactiva a previsualización na xanela da base de datos.
d .uno%3ADBSort 11 Abre un submenú.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 5a Selecciona o depósito de táboas e mostra todas as táboas na visualización de detalles.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 11 Abre un submenú.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 5e Selecciona o depósito de consultas e mostra todas as consultas na visualización de detalles.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 60 A xanela de previsualización mostra a información sobre o documento dun formulario ou informe.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 5c Selecciona o depósito de informes e mostra todos os informes na visualización de detalles.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 62 Selecciona o depósito de formularios e mostra todos os formularios na visualización de detalles.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 11 Abre un submenú.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD 9e Escolla esta opción para usar o mesmo nome de usuario e o mesmo contrasinal ao conectarse de novo coa mesma fonte de datos na sesión actual de %PRODUCTNAME.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 3c Introduza o contrasinal para a conexión coa fonte de datos.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 40 Introduza o nome de usuario para a conexión coa fonte de datos.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 49 O Asistente de consultas axuda no deseño de consultas de bases de datos.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 36 Mostra os campos que se van incluír na nova consulta.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 32 Especifica a táboa para a cal se crea a consulta.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 47 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira descendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 77 Especifica campos adicionais utilizados para ordenar a consulta creada, se os campos de ordenación previos son iguais.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 77 Especifica campos adicionais utilizados para ordenar a consulta creada, se os campos de ordenación previos son iguais.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 46 Prema para ordenar alfabética ou numericamente de maneira ascendente.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 77 Especifica campos adicionais utilizados para ordenar a consulta creada, se os campos de ordenación previos son iguais.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 4a Especifica o campo utilizado como criterio para ordenar a consulta creada.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 2a Introduza o valor da condición de filtro.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 2a Introduza o valor da condición de filtro.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 2a Introduza o valor da condición de filtro.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 22 Seleccione a condición do filtro.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 33 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de filtro.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 33 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de filtro.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 33 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de filtro.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 63 Seleccione esta opción para filtrar a consulta por calquera condición que use o valor lóxico OU.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 64 Seleccione esta opción para filtrar a consulta por todas as condicións que usen o valor lóxico E.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 22 Engade unha nova fila de controis.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 25 Seleccione o nome do campo numérico.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1f Seleccione a función agregada.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 23 Elimina a última fila de controis.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 4f Seleccione esta opción para mostrar só os resultados das funcións agregadas.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 44 Seleccione esta opción para mostrar todos os rexistros da consulta.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 38 Mostra os campos que se usarán para agrupar a consulta.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2f Introduza o valor da condición de agrupamento.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 27 Seleccione a condición do agrupamento.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 27 Seleccione a condición do agrupamento.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 27 Seleccione a condición do agrupamento.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 38 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2f Introduza o valor da condición de agrupamento.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 38 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2f Introduza o valor da condición de agrupamento.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 38 Seleccione o nome de campo da condición de agrupamento.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 69 Seleccione esta opción para agrupar a consulta por calquera das condicións que usen o valor lóxico OU.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 5d Seleccione esta opción para agrupar a consulta polas condicións que usen o valor lóxico E.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 24 Introduza o alcume do nome de campo.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 46 Seleccione esta opción para gardar a consulta e abrila para edición.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 1d Mostra un resumo da consulta.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 39 Seleccione esta opción para gardar e mostrar a consulta.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1d Introduza o nome da consulta.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Ftime 8b Activar Incluír hora para inserir unha hora na área activa do informe. O campo da hora mostra mostra a hora cando o informe é executado.
2f modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2Fdate 92 Activar Incluír data para inserir un campo de data na área activa do informe. O campo da data mostra a data actual cando o informe é executado.
39 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fdatetimedialog%2FDateTimeDialog 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 5f You can open the Date and Time dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction a9 In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
36 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Falignment e Páxina N de M
34 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Ftoppage e Páxina N de M
37 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fbottompage e Páxina N de M
35 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagenofm e Páxina N de M
32 modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2Fpagen e Páxina N de M
3d modules%2Fdbreport%2Fui%2Fpagenumberdialog%2FPageNumberDialog 5d You can open the Page Numbers dialog of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Page Numbers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN e Páxina N de M
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 53 Sets the background color for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b2 In the Sorting and Grouping dialog of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 3f O asistente de táboas axuda a crear táboas de bases de datos.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Mostra todos os campos que se incluirán na nova táboa.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES bb Escolla unha das táboas de mostra e, a seguir, seleccione algúns campos desa táboa na caixa de lista situada á esquerda. Repita este paso ata seleccionar todos os campos que necesite.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 49 Seleccione a categoría persoal para ver só mostras de táboas persoais.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 4e Seleccione a categoría de negocio para ver só mostras de táboas comerciais.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 72 Introduza a orde SQL que indica á fonte de datos o incremento automático do campo de datos INTEGER especificado.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 3d Se está definido como Si, este campo non pode estar baleiro.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 4b Se a opción é Si, o mecanismo da base de datos xera o valor para o campo.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 58 Mostra o nome do campo de datos seleccionado. Se o desexa, pode introducir un novo nome.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 31 Engadir un novo campo de datos á caixa de lista.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 30 Eliminar o campo seleccionado da caixa de lista.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 2f Seleccione un campo para editar a información.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 55 Seleccione un campo ou prema en > para engadilo á lista de campos de chave primaria.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC dd Seleccione esta opción para introducir automaticamente un valor e incrementar o valor dos campos en cada novo rexistro. A base de datos debe soportar o incremento automático para poder usar a función Valor automático.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED ae Seleccione un campo e prema en < para eliminalo da lista de campos de chave primaria. A chave primaria créase como concatenación dos campos desta lista, de arriba a abaixo.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE dd Seleccione esta opción para introducir automaticamente un valor e incrementar o valor dos campos en cada novo rexistro. A base de datos debe soportar o incremento automático para poder usar a función Valor automático.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 1b Seleccione o nome de campo.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 5d Seleccione esta opción para crear chaves primarias mediante a combinación de varios campos.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 60 Seleccione esta opción para usar como chave primaria un campo existente con valores exclusivos.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 5e Seleccione esta opción para engadir automaticamente unha chave primaria como campo adicional.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY 118 Seleccione esta opción para crear unha chave primaria. Engada unha chave primaria a cada táboa da base de datos para identificar de forma exclusiva cada rexistro. Nalgúns sistemas de base de datos de %PRODUCTNAME o uso de chaves primarias é obrigatorio para editar as táboas.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD b2 Seleccione esta opción para crear un formulario baseado nesta táboa. O formulario créase nun documento de texto coa última configuración usada polo Asistente de formularios.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 5f Seleccione esta opción para gardar o deseño da táboa e abrir a táboa para introducir datos.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 41 Seleccione esta opción para gardar e editar o deseño da táboa.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 56 Seleccione o esquema da táboa. (Só dispoñíbel se a base de datos soporta esquemas)
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 5a Seleccione o catálogo da táboa. (Só dispoñíbel se a base de datos soporta catálogos)
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 1c Especifica o nome da táboa.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1f Elimina o informe seleccionado.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 35 Abre o informe seleccionado para modificar o deseño.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 22 Renomea o formulario seleccionado.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 22 Elimina o formulario seleccionado.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 4a Abre o informe seleccionado para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 3e Abre o formulario seleccionado para poder modificar o deseño.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 4d Abre o formulario seleccionado para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 20 Elimina a consulta seleccionada.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1f Renomea o informe seleccionado.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 38 Abre a consulta seleccionada para modificar a estrutura.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 20 Renomea a consulta seleccionada.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 4b Abre a consulta seleccionada para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1e Renomea a táboa seleccionada.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1e Elimina a táboa seleccionada.
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 36 Abre a táboa seleccionada para modificar a estrutura.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 49 Abre a táboa seleccionada para introducir, editar ou eliminar rexistros.
c FontWork2TBO 3b Introduza o valor de espazamento entre caracteres Fontwork.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 34 Abre a xanela Espazamento entre caracteres Fontwork.
c FontWork1TBO 45 Prema para aplicar o aliñamento aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 56 Prema para aplicar o espazamento entre caracteres aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 26 Abre a xanela Aliñamento de Fontwork.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 64 Cambia a altura das letras Fontwork dos obxectos seleccionados de normal á mesma altura para todos.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes 70 Abre a barra de ferramentas Forma Fontwork. Prema nunha forma para aplicala aos obxectos Fontwork seleccionados.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 52 Mantén os cambios de todos os demais usuarios, anula os cambios que vostede fixo.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 45 Mantén o cambio do outro usuario, anula os cambios que vostede fixo.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 49 Mantén todos os cambios que vostede fixo, anula todos os demais cambios.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 3e Mantén os cambios que vostede fixo e anula os demais cambios.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2Fshare dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS a0 Se os mesmos contidos son cambiados por usuarios diferentes, ábrese o diálogo Resolver conflitos. Para cada conflito hai que decidir que cambios se manteñen.
3d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fsharedocumentdlg%2FShareDocumentDialog 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 66 Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 6b Se preme no botón Pechar da barra de ferramentas Filtro de formulario, o formulario móstrase sen filtros.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 79 Se preme na icona Aplicar filtro baseado en formulario na barra de ferramentas Filtro de formulario, aplicarase o filtro.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fnewtoolbardialog%2FNewToolbarDialog 39 Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons.
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL e8 Nese menú pode editar as condicións de filtraxe directamente como texto. Para verificar se un filtro posúe ou non contido, pode seleccionar as condicións de filtro "baleiro" (SQL:"é nulo") ou "non baleiro" (SQL: "non é nulo").
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL e8 Nese menú pode editar as condicións de filtraxe directamente como texto. Para verificar se un filtro posúe ou non contido, pode seleccionar as condicións de filtro "baleiro" (SQL:"é nulo") ou "non baleiro" (SQL: "non é nulo").
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT e8 Nese menú pode editar as condicións de filtraxe directamente como texto. Para verificar se un filtro posúe ou non contido, pode seleccionar as condicións de filtro "baleiro" (SQL:"é nulo") ou "non baleiro" (SQL: "non é nulo").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 18d As condicións de filtraxe definidas móstranse no Navegador de filtros. Ao definir un filtro, aparece unha entrada de filtro en branco na parte inferior do Navegador de filtro. Pode seleccionar esa entrada premendo na palabra "Ou", o que lle permitirá introducir condicións de filtraxe adicionais. Estas condicións están ligadas mediante un OU booleano coas condicións definidas previamente.
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 76 Para conectar varias condicións de filtraxe co OU booleano, prema a icona Navegación de filtros na barra de filtros.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic 99 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Graphics Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type.
1c .uno%3APreviousTrackedChange 41 Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any.
18 .uno%3ANextTrackedChange 3d Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 35 The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialog.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 3c The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialog.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
24 sfx2%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2Fall_recent 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AExtensions 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
1c .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AInfo 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
25 sfx2%2Fui%2Fstartcenter%2FStartCenter 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 36 Click an icon to open a new document or a file dialog.
c .uno%3AAbout 57 Mostra información xeral sobre o programa, como o número de versión e os copyrights.
13 .uno%3AOnlineUpdate 122 Permitir unha conexión á Internet para %PRODUCTNAME. Se precisa dun proxy, prema a configuración de proxy do %PRODUCTNAME en Ferramentas - Opcións - Internet. Alí, escolla Comprobar se hai actualizacións para comprobar a existencia dunha versión máis nova desta suite de ofimática.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits db Amosa o documento CREDITS.odt no que se inclúe a lista cos nomes dos colaboradores que contribuíron no código fonte de OpenOffice.org (e con contribucións importadas a LibreOffice) ou a LibreOffice desde 28-09-2010.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 3d Amosa o cadro de diálogo da licenza e da información legal.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 64 Abre a páxina principal da Axuda de $[officename] do aplicativo que está a ser usado nese momento.
13 .uno%3ASendFeedback 75 Abrir un formulario para enviar comentarios no navegador web no que os usuarios poden informar de fallos do software.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu 51 O menú da Axuda permite iniciar e controlar o sistema da Axuda de $[officename].
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 5c Activa as suxestións de axuda adicionais baixo o apuntador do rato ata que se volva premer.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 8b A barra estándar está localizada na parte superior da xanela de $[officename] e está dispoñíbel en todos os aplicativos $[officename].
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 7a A barra Táboa contén as funcións necesarias para traballar con táboas. Aparece ao situar o cursor dentro dunha táboa.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 53 Inicia o asistente de combinación de correspondencia para crear cartas formulario.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns 49 Insire os campos do rexistro marcado na posición do cursor no documento.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 16 Crea un novo rexistro.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 2b Permítelle desfacer unha entrada de datos.
e .uno%3ARecSave 48 Garda unha nova entrada de datos. O cambio rexístrase na base de datos.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 1b Lévao ao último rexistro.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 1c Lévao ao seguinte rexistro.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 4f Elimina un rexistro. Para eliminar unha consulta é necesario confirmala antes.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 1c Lévao ao rexistro anterior.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 1c Lévao ao primeiro rexistro.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord 5d Mostra o número do rexistro actual. Introduza un número para ir ao rexistro correspondente.
e .uno%3AGridUse 43 Especifica que só pode mover os obxectos entre os puntos da grade.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 1f Pecha unha liña ou unha curva.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 44 Esta icona converte un punto de canto ou suave nun punto simétrico.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 38 Converte un punto de canto ou simétrico en punto suave.
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 3c Marca o punto actual ou os puntos seleccionados para borrar.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 3c Converte en puntos de canto o punto ou puntos seleccionados.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 72 A icona Dividir curva divide unha curva. Seleccione o punto ou puntos onde desexa dividir a curva e prema na icona
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 30 Converte unha curva en liña recta ou viceversa.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete ac Utilice a icona Eliminar puntos para eliminar un ou varios puntos seleccionados. Para seleccionar varios puntos, manteña premida a tecla Maiús ao premer en cada un deles.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 32 Activa o modo inserir, que permite inserir puntos.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 28 Activa un modo en que pode mover puntos.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX 55 A barra Editar puntos aparece cando selecciona un polígono e preme en Editar puntos.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 27 Seleccione a entrada que desexa editar.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 5f Esta orde abre unha caixa de diálogo que permite configurar o programa de forma personalizada.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Femail 21 Teclee o seu correo electrónico.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Femail 21 Teclee o seu correo electrónico.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Ffax 1c Teclee o seu número de fax.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fwork 2e Teclee o número de teléfono da súa empresa.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fhome 2a Teclee o seu número de teléfono privado.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fposition 13 Teclee o seu cargo.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fposition 13 Teclee o seu cargo.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ftitle 21 Teclee o seu título profesional.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffax 1c Teclee o seu número de fax.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastfirstname 12 Teclee o seu nome.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstate 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastlastname 18 Teclee os seus apelidos.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Ficity 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ficity 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fizip 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fstreet 1b Teclee o nome da súa rúa.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fizip 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcompany 2a Teclee neste campo o nome da súa empresa.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ftitle 21 Teclee o seu título profesional.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fstreet 1b Teclee o nome da súa rúa.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Frusshortname 19 Teclee as súas iniciais.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Flastname 18 Teclee os seus apelidos.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffax 1c Teclee o seu número de fax.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fshortname 19 Teclee as súas iniciais.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Feastshortname 19 Teclee as súas iniciais.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fshortname 19 Teclee as súas iniciais.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Frusfirstname 12 Teclee o seu nome.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstreet 1b Teclee o nome da súa rúa.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fizip 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fruslastname 18 Teclee os seus apelidos.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ficity 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Flastname 18 Teclee os seus apelidos.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fstate 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Femail 21 Teclee o seu correo electrónico.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fbusinessdatapage%2Fcompany 2a Teclee neste campo o nome da súa empresa.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fcity 2b Teclee o nome da súa cidade de residencia.
1c cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Fzip 1c Teclee o seu código postal.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2FOptUserPage 41 Use este separador para introducir ou editar os datos de usuario.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Fstate 22 Teclee o nome do estado onde vive.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptuserpage%2Ffirstname 12 Teclee o seu nome.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprivateuserpage%2Ffirstname 12 Teclee o seu nome.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fsaveas cb Especifica que os documentos do tipo seleccionado á esquerda se garden sempre con este tipo de ficheiro. Pode seleccionar outro tipo de ficheiro para o documento actual na caixa de diálogo Gardar como.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_inet 41 Escolla esta opción para o gardado relativo dos URL á Internet.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdoctype 5b Especifica o tipo de documento para o que desexa definir o formato de ficheiro predefinido.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Frelative_fsys 59 Marque esta caixa para seleccionar a gravación relativa de URLs no sistema de ficheiros.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fuserautosave b4 Especifica que %PRODUCTNAME garda todos os documentos abertos ao gardar a información de recuperación automática. Usa o mesmo intervalo temporal que a recuperación automática.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave_spin 60 Especifica cada cantos minutos gardar os documentos para a opción de recuperación automática.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fodfversion 13b Algunhas empresas ou organizacións poden esixir documentos ODF no formato ODF 1.0/1.1. Pódese escoller con que formato se grava no menú despregábel. Este formato máis antigo non pode almacenar todas as funcionalidades novas, polo que se recomenda empregar o novo formato ODF 1.2 (Estendido) cando for posíbel.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fautosave a5 Especifica que %PRODUCTNAME garde a información necesaria para restabelecer os documentos abertos en caso de falla. Pode indicar o intervalo temporal de gravación.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fbackup ba Cada vez que garda o documento garda tamén a versión anterior como copia de seguranza, coa extensión .BAK. Sempre que %PRODUCTNAME crea unha copia de seguranza, substitúe a anterior.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fwarnalienformat ca Pode escoller recibir unha mensaxe de aviso ao gardar un documento nun formato que non sexa de OpenDocument ou que non sexa o formato por omisión en Cargar/Gardar - Xeral na caixa de diálogo Opcións.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fdocinfo 65 Especifica que a caixa de diálogo Propiedades aparecerá cada vez que seleccione a orde Gardar como.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_docprinter 16c If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked.
20 sfx%2Fui%2Falienwarndialog%2Fask ca Pode escoller recibir unha mensaxe de aviso ao gardar un documento nun formato que non sexa de OpenDocument ou que non sexa o formato por omisión en Cargar/Gardar - Xeral na caixa de diálogo Opcións.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2Fload_settings 47 Carga co documento a configuración específica do usuario gardada nel.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsavepage%2FOptSavePage 7d Na sección Xeralpode seleccionar a configuración predefinida para gardar documentos e os formatos predefinidos de ficheiro.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fedit 4f Prema para acceder á caixa de diálogo Seleccionar camiño ou Editar camiños.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fdefault 5d O botón Predefinido restabelece os camiños predefinidos de todas as entradas seleccionadas.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2Fpaths 72 Para modificar unha entrada desta lista, prémaa e a seguir prema Editar. Tamén pode facer duplo clic na entrada.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptpathspage%2FOptPathsPage 8b Esta sección contén as rutas por omisión a algúns cartafoles importantes do $[officename]. Estas rutas poden ser editadas polo usuario.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH 8b Abre a caixa de diálogo Seleccionar camiños para seleccionar outro cartafol ou a caixa de diálogo Abrir para seleccionar outro ficheiro.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH 5e Contén unha lista dos camiños xa engadidos. Marca o camiño predefinido para novos ficheiros
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 4b Verifica a ortografía e subliña os erros de forma automática ao teclear.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 44 Define as opcións da verificación ortográfica e da guionización.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsdelete 5d Elimina o dicionario seleccionado depois de confirmar, se non está protexido contra escrita.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fbreaknumberoptions%2FBreakNumberOption 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
2c cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fnewreplace a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
36 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2FEditDictionaryDialog 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flinguoptionsedit 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsedit 71 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fbook 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fexcept 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 2e Lista os dicionarios de usuario dispoñíbeis.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Flang 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
28 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fdelete 36 Elimina a palabra marcada do dicionario personalizado.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Fnameedit 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
3a cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2FOptNewDictionaryDialog 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingudictsnew 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW 8a Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptnewdictionarydialog%2Flanguage 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlingupage%2Flingumodulesedit 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
26 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Fword 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 29 Contén os módulos de idioma instalados.
29 cui%2Fui%2Feditdictionarydialog%2Freplace a6 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 68 Especifica as propiedades da verificación ortográfica, do dicionario de sinónimos e da guionización.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 4a Prema nesta opción para desfacer os cambios realizados na caixa de lista.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 4a Disminúe un nivel a prioridade do módulo seleccionado na caixa de lista.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 48 Aumenta un nivel a prioridade do módulo seleccionado na caixa de lista.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 1f Especifica o idioma do módulo.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES 8b Especifica o idioma, a ortografía, a guionización e os submódulos do dicionario de sinónimos dispoñíbeis para o módulo seleccionado.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE 68 Abre a caixa de diálogo Gardar como, que lle permite gardar a táboa actual de cores cun nome concreto.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 54 Accede á caixa  de diálogo Abrir, que lle permite seleccionar unha paleta de cores
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 54 Accede á caixa  de diálogo Abrir, que lle permite seleccionar unha paleta de cores
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 14 Cambia a cor actual.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 15 Engade unha nova cor.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 5 Verde
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 8 Vermello
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL 6c Para modificar, seleccione o modelo de cor: RGB (Vermello-Verde-Azul) ou CMYK (Ciano-Maxenta-Amarelo-Negro).
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 4 Azul
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 5b Contén a lista das cores dispoñíbeis. Se desexa seleccionar unha cor escóllaa na lista.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME 34 Especifica o nome da cor seleccionada ou dunha nova.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR 62 Permítelle seleccionar unha cor da táboa de cores, editar unha existente ou definir novas cores.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 3d Define o valor ou chave da cor negra no modelo de cores CMYK.
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 27 Define o brillo no modelo de cores HSB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 26 Define o matiz no modelo de cores HSB.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 3d Define o valor ou chave da cor negra no modelo de cores CMYK.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 32 Define o valor da cor azul no modelo de cores RGB.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 36 Define o valor da cor amarela no modelo de cores CMYK.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 36 Define o valor da cor amarela no modelo de cores CMYK.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 33 Define o valor da cor verde no modelo de cores RGB.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 36 Define o valor da cor vermella no modelo de cores RGB.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 36 Define o valor da cor maxenta no modelo de cores CMYK.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 36 Define o valor da cor maxenta no modelo de cores CMYK.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 34 Define o valor da cor ciano no modelo de cores CMYK.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 2c Define a saturación no modelo de cores HSB.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 34 Define o valor da cor ciano no modelo de cores CMYK.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 b5 Sitúa o cursor de selección pequeno da xanela dereita sobre a cor que corresponde á seleccionada na xanela esquerda, e actualiza os valores correspondentes nos campos numéricos.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 a4 Prema no botón <-- para substituír a cor seleccionada na paleta pola cor seleccionada á dereita. O botón actívase ao seleccionar unha cor nun dos catro cantos.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fyear 55 Define un intervalo de data, dentro do cal o sistema recoñece anos de dous díxitos.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ffiledlg a5 Especifica se as caixas de diálogo de $[officename] se van usar para abrir e gardar documentos. De non ser así, úsanse as caixas de diálogo do sistema operativo.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fdocstatus 41 Especifica se a impresión do documento conta como modificación.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fexthelp 79 Mostra un texto de axuda ao pousar o apuntador sobre unha icona, un menú de ordes ou un control dunha caixa de diálogo.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftooltips 86 Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 33 Especifica a configuración xeral de $[officename].
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontheight 5d Seleccione un tamaño de tipo de letra para a visualización dos códigos fonte HTML e Basic.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fnonpropfontonly 61 Comprobe que na lista de caixa Tipos de letra só se visualizan tipos de letra non proporcionais.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffontname 50 Seleccione o tipo de letra para a visualización dos código fonte HTML e Basic.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fdelete 29 Elimina a substitución de tipo de letra.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fapply 28 Aplica a substitución de tipo de letra.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont2 41 Insira ou seleccione o nome do tipo de letra que desexa utilizar.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Ffont1 44 Teclee ou seleccione o nome do tipo de letra que desexa substituír.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fchecklb 128 Lista o tipo de letra orixinal e o tipo de letra que o substitúe. Escolla Sempre para substituír o tipo de letra, mesmo se o tipo orixinal estiver instalado no sistema. Escolla Só na pantalla para substituír só o tipo de letra da pantalla e non substituír nunca o tipo de letra ao imprimir.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2Fusetable 43 Activa a configuración de substitución de tipo de letra definida.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptfontspage%2FOptFontsPage 105 Substitúe un tipo de letra por un tipo de letra que se escolla. A substitución substitúe un tipo de letra só cando este se mostra na pantalla ou na pantalla ao imprimir. A substitución non cambia a configuración do tipo de letra que se grava no documento.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 96 Seleccione o nivel de transparencia das seleccións transparentes. O valor predeterminado é do 75%. Pódense seleccionar valores entre o 10% e o 90%.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL 80 Accede directamente aos recursos de hardware do adaptador gráfico de visualización para mellorar a visualización da pantalla.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 94 No comezo da lista situada na caixa Nome de tipo de letra da barra Formatado móstranse os últimos cinco tipos de letra usados no documento actual.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 6f Especifica se o apuntador do rato se debe colocar nas caixas de diálogo acabadas de abrir e como debe facerse.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView b8 Especifica se restaurar ou non a visualización do último documento utilizado. Restauraranse moitas das propiedades de visualización válidas a última vez que se gardou o documento.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 56 Prema Maiús+Ctrl+R para restaurar ou actualizar a visualización do documento actual.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 2c Define a función do botón central do rato.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW 97 Mostra os nomes dos tipos de letra seleccionábeis no tipo de letra correspondente, por exemplo, os situados na caixa Tipo de letra da barra Formatado.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 50 Escoller o estilo das iconas das iconas das barras de ferramentas e o diálogos.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION be Cando está activado, a selección de texto no Writer e a de celas no Calc móstranse empregando unha cor transparente. Cando non está activado, a selección móstrase con cores invertidas.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT 88 Especifica a utilización do tipo de letra do sistema nos menús e caixas de diálogo. Se non, utilízase outro tipo de letra instalado.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT 88 Especifica a utilización do tipo de letra do sistema nos menús e caixas de diálogo. Se non, utilízase outro tipo de letra instalado.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 45 Especifica o tamaño ao que se mostran as iconas da barra de tarefas.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 50 Escoller o estilo das iconas das iconas das barras de ferramentas e o diálogos.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 45 Especifica o tamaño ao que se mostran as iconas da barra de tarefas.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 8f Usa a escala do percentil para o tamaño do tipo de letra nos elementos da interface de usuario, como caixas de diálogo e etiquetas de iconas.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS c3 Mostra iconas a carón dos elementos de menú correspondentes. Escolla entre «Automático», «Ocultar» e «Amosar». «Automático» mostra as iconas segundo as opcións do sistema e os temas.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 26 Especifica opcións de visualización.
23 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpapersize 59 Marque esta opción se se precisa determinado tamaño de papel para imprimir o documento.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradcolor 49 Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstripes 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
1f sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ftrans 66 Marque esta opción se desexa recibir un aviso sempre que o documento conteña obxectos transparentes.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmaptrans 85 Se este campo está marcado, a redución na calidade impresa dos mapas de bits tamén se aplica ás zonas transparentes dos obxectos.
2b sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapresol 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapdpi 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
2d sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapoptimal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
28 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegradstep 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmap 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
27 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fconverttogray 38 Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale.
21 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fprinter 5c Especifica se a configuración se aplica á impresión directa ou á impresión en ficheiro.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransnone 32 Con esta opción a transparencia nunca se imprime.
2c sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducebitmapnormal 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
29 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetransauto 6f Especifica que a transparencia só se imprime se a zona transparente cobre menos dun cuarto da páxina enteira.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Fpaperorient 5e Marque esta opción se se precisa determinada orientación do papel para imprimir o documento.
25 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducetrans aa Ao marcar este campo, os obxectos transparentes imprímense da maneira habitual e os obxectos non transparentes segundo o escollido nos dous botóns de opción seguintes.
1e sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Ffile 5c Especifica se a configuración se aplica á impresión directa ou á impresión en ficheiro.
24 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2Freducegrad 4d Se este campo está marcado, os gradientes imprímense con calidade reducida.
26 sfx%2Fui%2Foptprintpage%2FOptPrintPage 37 Especifica as opcións de configuración de impresión.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fsystray 9c Marque esta opción se desexa que o $[officename] active o inicio rápido. Esta opción está dispoñíbel se o módulo de inicio rápido estiver instalado.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Folecache 3d Escolla o número máximo de obxectos OLE reunidos na caché.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fobjecttime 4f Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fquicklaunch 9c Marque esta opción se desexa que o $[officename] active o inicio rápido. Esta opción está dispoñíbel se o módulo de inicio rápido estiver instalado.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fobjectcache 64 Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fgraphiccache 30 Specifies the total cache size for all graphics.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptmemorypage%2Fundo 5b You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the box.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptmemoryspage%2FOptMemoryPage 58 Define a configuración da caché para as imaxes e o número de pasos que pode desfacer.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fdelete 61 Elimina o esquema de cores mostrado na caixa Esquema. O esquema predefinido non se pode eliminar.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorconfig 3e Seleccione as cores para os elementos da interface de usuario.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 2a Introduza un nome para o esquema de cores.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fsave 62 Garda a configuración actual como un esquema de cores que máis adiante vostede poderá recargar.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2Fcolorschemelb 32 Selecciona o esquema de cores que desexa utilizar.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptappearancepage%2FOptAppearancePage 39 Define as cores da interface de usuario de $[officename].
38 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fsystempagepreviewcolor 61 Aplica a configuración de alto contraste do sistema operativo ás previsualizacións de páxina.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautofontcolor 89 Mostra os tipos de letra en %PRODUCTNAME usando a configuración de cor do sistema. Esta opción afecta só á presentación en pantalla.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fautodetecthc 59 Cambia %PRODUCTNAME ao modo alto contraste cando a cor do fondo do sistema é moi escura.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftiphelptimeoutnf 52 Especifique durante cantos segundos desexa que se mostren as suxestións da Axuda.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftiphelptimeout 5c Oculta as suxestións da Axuda ao transcorrer o número de segundos introducido por vostede.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedtext 50 Previsualiza texto animado, como o que pestanexa e se despraza, en %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Fanimatedgraphics 42 Previsualiza imaxes animadas, como as imaxes GIF, en %PRODUCTNAME.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Ftextselinreadonly 2d Mostra o cursor en documentos só de lectura.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2Facctool 114 Permite usar ferramentas tecnolóxicas adaptadas para persoas con discapacidades, como lectores de pantalla externos, dispositivos Braille ou de recoñecemento de voz. Para poder activalas é necesario que o JRE (contorno de execución Java) estea instalado no seu computador.
36 cui%2Fui%2Foptaccessibilitypage%2FOptAccessibilityPage ab Define as opcións que permiten que as persoas con problemas de visión, coordinación, ou outras deficiencias, accedan con máis facilidade aos programas de %PRODUCTNAME.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftpport 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttpsport 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fnoproxy 5f Especifica os nomes dos servidores que non requiren servidor proxy, separados por punto e coma.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fftp 29 Teclee o nome do servidor proxy para FTP.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttps 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttpport 30 Teclee o porto do servidor proxy correspondente.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fproxymode 2a Especifica o tipo de definición de proxy.
1e cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2Fhttp 2a Teclee o nome do servidor proxy para HTTP.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptproxypage%2FOptProxyPage 2a Especifica o tipo de definición de proxy.
23 cui%2Fui%2Foptbrowserpage%2Fdisplay 108 Activa o engadido do navegador para que presente os documentos do %PRODUCTNAME nunha xanela do navegador. Escolla, prema Aceptar e reinicie o navegador. A seguir, na xanela do navegador, hai que premer calquera hiperligazón con calquera documento de %PRODUCTNAME.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptbrowserpage%2FOptBrowserPage 108 Activa o engadido do navegador para que presente os documentos do %PRODUCTNAME nunha xanela do navegador. Escolla, prema Aceptar e reinicie o navegador. A seguir, na xanela do navegador, hai que premer calquera hiperligazón con calquera documento de %PRODUCTNAME.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmacro 2c Abre a caixa de diálogo Seguranza de macro.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fchange 54 Abre un diálogo no que se pode ver e cambiar o contrasinal da entrada seleccionada.
30 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fremoveall 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
40 cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2FStoredWebConnectionDialog 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Foptions 39 Abre o diálogo «Opcións de seguranza e advertencias».
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fconnections 70 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword1 20 Introducir o contrasinal mestre.
2b uui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2Fpassword2 28 Volva a introducir o contrasinal mestre.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenpdf a3 Escolla se desexa ver un diálogo de advertencia ao tentar exportar un documento ao formato PDF que mostre cambios rexistrados en Writer ou que mostre comentarios.
39 cui%2Fui%2Fsetmasterpassworddlg%2FSetMasterPasswordDialog 20 Introducir o contrasinal mestre.
38 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2FSecurityOptionsDialog 94 Escolla se desexa ver un diálogo de advertencia ao tentar gravar ou enviar un documento que conteña cambios rexistrados, versións ou comentarios.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fsavepassword ed Se está activado, o %PRODUCTNAME almacena de maneira segura todos os contrasinais que se usen para acceder a ficheiros que estean en servidores web. Pódense recuperar os contrasinais da lista após ter introducido o contrasinal mestre.
2b cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fpassword c8 Active a opción Gardar con contrasinal para que se solicite un contrasinal nas caixas de diálogo para gardar ficheiros. Desmarque a opción se desexa gardar os ficheiros por defecto sen contrasinal.
31 cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fremovepersonal f8 Escolla para retirar sempre os datos do usuario das propiedades dos ficheiros. Se esta opción non estiver seleccionada, a información persoal pódese retirar igualmente do documento actual co botón Restabelecer en Ficheiro - Propiedades - Xeral.
2d cui%2Fui%2Fstoredwebconnectiondialog%2Fremove 28 Elimina a entrada seleccionada da lista.
33 uui%2Fui%2Fmasterpassworddlg%2FMasterPasswordDialog 2e Introduza o contrasinal mestre para continuar.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fsavesenddocs 94 Escolla se desexa ver un diálogo de advertencia ao tentar gravar ou enviar un documento que conteña cambios rexistrados, versións ou comentarios.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhensigning d7 Escolla se desexa ver un diálogo de advertencia ao tentar asinar un documento que conteña cambios rexistrados, campos, referencias a outras fontes (por exemplo, seccións ligadas ou imaxes ligadas) ou comentarios.
2c cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fctrlclick 9f Se está activado, hai que manter a tecla Ctrl premida ao premer unha hiperligazón que siga esa ligazón. Se non está activado, un clic abre a hiperligazón.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2FOptSecurityPage 81 Define as opcións de seguranza para gravar documentos, para as conexións á rede e parar abrir documentos que conteñan macros.
2f cui%2Fui%2Fsecurityoptionsdialog%2Fwhenprinting 7c Escolla para ver un diálogo de advertencia ao tentar imprimir un documento que conteña cambios rexistrados ou comentarios.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptsecuritypage%2Fmasterpassword 30 Abre o diálogo Introducir o contrasinal mestre.
27 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fprintextension 52 Se marca este campo expórtase tamén o deseño de impresión do documento actual.
25 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsavegrflocal dd Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasic 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fcharset 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
28 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fignorefontnames 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
23 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Funknowntag 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fexport 32 Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize6 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize5 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fstarbasicwarning 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize4 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize3 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize2 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
29 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fnumbersenglishus f5 Se non está marcado, os números interprétanse segundo se configurase na caixa de diálogo Opcións de Configuración de idioma - Idiomas - Configuración local. Se está marcado, os números interprétanse como que seguen «Inglés (EE.UU)».
1e cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2Fsize1 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fopthtmlpage%2FOptHtmlPage 20 Defines settings for HTML pages.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a1 Esta configuración determina como tratar os documentos de texto creados en $[officename]. Tamén pode definir a configuración para o documento de texto actual.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fmeasureunit 2a Especifica a unidade para documentos HTML.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fdrawings 33 Mostra os debuxos e controis contidos no documento.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ffieldcodes 46 Mostra os nomes dos campos existentes no documento, en vez do contido.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries b0 Para mostrar os límites de táboa prema co botón dereito do rato en calquera táboa e escolla Bordos de táboa ou escolla Táboa - Límites de táboa nun documento de Writer.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Ftables 2a Mostra as táboas existentes no documento.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fgraphics 3f Especifica se deben mostrarse en pantalla os obxectos e imaxes.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulerright 29 Aliña a regra vertical ao bordo dereito.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhelplines ab Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhruler 55 Mostra a regra horizontal. Seleccione unha unidade de medida na lista correspondente.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvrulercombobox 59 Mostra a regra vertical. Seleccione a unidade de medida desexada na lista correspondente.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fruler 73 Activa as regras. Use as dúas caixas de verificación seguintes para seleccionar a(s) regra(s) que desexa mostrar.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fsmoothscroll 34 Activa a función de desprazamento suave de páxina.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fcomments 114 Mostra comentarios. Prema un comentario para editar o texto. Empregue o menú de contexto do Navegador para localizar ou eliminar un comentario. Empregue o menú de contexto do comentario para eliminar ese comentario ou todos os comentarios ou todos os comentarios dese autor.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvscrollbar 29 Mostra a barra de desprazamento vertical.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fvruler 59 Mostra a regra vertical. Seleccione a unidade de medida desexada na lista correspondente.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhscrollbar 2b Mostra a barra de desprazamento horizontal.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2Fhrulercombobox 55 Mostra a regra horizontal. Seleccione unha unidade de medida na lista correspondente.
3a modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fviewoptionspage%2FViewOptionsPage 85 Define a configuración predefinida para a visualización de obxectos nos documentos de texto, así como para os elementos de xanela.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fdoconly 3f Specifies that the settings apply to the current document only.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelbox 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitlebox 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Findexheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fidxbox 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Ftitleheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flistbox 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Flabelheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardheight 26 Especifica o tamaño do tipo de letra.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2Fstandardbox 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptfonttabpage%2FOptFontTabPage 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fpapertray a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fendpage 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fend 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fonly 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fnone 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fleftpages 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
3b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ftextplaceholder 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frightpages 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Ffax 8e Se instalou un programa de fax no computador e desexa enviar un fax directamente desde o documento de texto, seleccione o fax que desexa usar.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Frtl 59 Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbackground 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2FPrintOptionsPage 49 Especifica a configuración de impresión nun documento de texto ou HTML.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 95 Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fbrochure 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fhiddentext 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 31 Especifica se se imprime sempre o texto en negro.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fformcontrols 45 Especifica se se imprimen os campos de control do documento de texto.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Finblack 31 Especifica se se imprime sempre o texto en negro.
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 45 Especifica se se imprimen os campos de control do documento de texto.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fgraphics 40 Indica se se desexa imprimir os gráficos do documento de texto.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fprintoptionspage%2Fblankpages 1d0 Estando esta opción activada, imprímense páxinas en branco inseridas automaticamente. Isto é útil cando se imprime por dúas caras. Nos libros, por exemplo, pódese definir o estilo de parágrafo "capítulo" de forma que comece sempre nunha páxina impar. Se o capítulo precedente termina nunha páxina impar, %PRODUCTNAME insire unha páxina en branco co número par correspondente. Este opción serve para estabelecer se se imprime esta páxina par ou non.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 40 Indica se se desexa imprimir os gráficos do documento de texto.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffix 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Ffixprop 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolinsert 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowmove 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumalignment 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumformatting 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
2b modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fvar 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frowinsert 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fnumfmtformatting 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognized and formatted as numbers.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fborder 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fdontsplit 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Frepeatheader 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fcolmove 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2Fheader 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fopttablepage%2FOptTablePage 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillspace 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillmargin 102 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursoronoff 1c Activates the direct cursor.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentextfield 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
39 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fcursorinprot 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fbreak 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffillindent 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ftabs 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
37 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddentext 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fnonbreak af Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhiddenparafield 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fspaces 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Ffilltab 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fhyphens 166 Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2Fparagraph 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptformataidspage%2FOptFormatAidsPage 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkcolor 43 Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchangedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeletedcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fmarkpos 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsertcolor e8 You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fchanged 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Fdeleted ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2Finsert 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptredlinepage%2FOptRedLinePage 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
34 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fsquaremode 47 When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fmetric 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatefields c8 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fnever 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fupdatecharts be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fneverrb 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2d modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Ftab 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fonrequest 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Frequestrb 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Falways 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falwaysrb 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2Fusecharunit 99 When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptgeneralpage%2FOptGeneralPage 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2Fdefault 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 82 Especifica que os parámetros da impresora se aplican tanto para a impresión como para o formatado da visualización na pantalla.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcompatpage%2FOptCompatPage 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcharstyle 21 Especifica o estilo de carácter.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fposition 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
36 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fseparator 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fnumbering 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fcategory 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fapplyborder 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Fobjects 59 Seleccione o tipo de obxecto para o cal é válida a configuración de Lenda automática.
2f modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2Flevel 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Foptcaptionpage%2FOptCaptionPage 59 Seleccione o tipo de obxecto para o cal é válida a configuración de Lenda automática.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsynchronize 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisiony 5a Especifique o número de puntos intermedios existentes entre os puntos da grade do eixo Y.
28 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fnumflddivisionx 5a Especifique o número de puntos intermedios existentes entre os puntos da grade do eixo X.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawx 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fgridvisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrflddrawy 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fusegridsnap 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2FOptGridPage cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions 11e Define varias opcións das follas de cálculo, o contido que se debe mostrar e o sentido do cursor tras realizar entradas en celas. Tamén permite definir listas de clasificación, determinar o número de decimais e a configuración quen se van usar para rexistrar e realzar os cambios.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions 11e Define varias opcións das follas de cálculo, o contido que se debe mostrar e o sentido do cursor tras realizar entradas en celas. Tamén permite definir listas de clasificación, determinar o número de decimais e a configuración quen se van usar para rexistrar e realzar os cambios.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Ftblreg 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fhscroll 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdraw 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fsynczoom 74 If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvscroll 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frowcolheader 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fnil 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fdiagram 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fvalue 111 Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fannot d1 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fclipmark f3 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fobjgrf 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fformula 43 Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Frangefind bf Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fbreak 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fanchor 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fcolor 3d Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Foutline 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
28 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fgrid db Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2Fguideline 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Ftpviewpage%2FTpViewPage 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Freplwarncb 6d Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fmarkhdrcb 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fformatcb 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Feditmodecb 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Falignlb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Faligncb 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftabmf 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Ftextfmtcb 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Fexprefcb f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2Funitlb 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
34 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Fscgeneralpage%2FScGeneralPage 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fadd 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdiscard 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
29 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fnew 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fcopy 10d Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fcopyfrom 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
2d modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fentries 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
2c modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Fdelete 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2b modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2Flists 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptsortslist%2FOptSortLists 9c All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 5c Seleccione a opción Columnas para resumir nunha lista o contido das columnas seleccionadas.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 56 Seleccione a opción Filas para resumir nunha lista o contido das filas seleccionadas.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 3f Permite copiar as celas xa marcadas nunha lista de ordenación.
35 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fgeneralprec dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fprec ae Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Flookup ec Especifica que se pode utilizar o texto de calquera cela como etiqueta para a columna situada debaixo do texto ou para a fila situada á dereita do texto. O texto debe conter unha palabra como mínimo e non pode conter ningún operador.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fregex 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fmatch 14b Especifica que os criterios de busca definidos para as funcións de base de datos de Calc deben aplicarse de forma exacta a toda a cela. Cando a caixa Os criterios de busca = e <> deben ser aplicados a celas enteiras está marcada,  $[officename]  Calc compórtase igual que MS Excel ao buscar celas nas funcións de base de datos.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcalc 145 Especifica se os cálculos deben realizarse cos valores arredondados que aparecen na folla de cálculo. As gráficas mostraranse cos valores visualizados. Se a opción Cálculo segundo o visualizado non foi marcada, os números exhibidos arredóndanse. Porén, internamente se calculan partindo dos números non arredondados.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fcase 74 Especifica se o aplicativo debe distinguir entre maiúsculas e minúsculas no texto, ao comparar o contido de celas.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdate1904 72 Define 1/1/1904 como día cero. Utilice esta configuración coas follas de cálculo importadas en formato externo.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatesc10 83 Define 1/1/1900 como día cero. Utilice esta configuración coas follas de cálculo de StarCalc 1.0 que conteñan entradas de data.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fdatestd 21 Define 30/12/1899 como día cero.
33 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fminchange 9a Especifica a diferenza entre o resultado de dous pasos consecutivos dunha iteración. Se é inferior ao valor de modificación mínimo, a iteración para.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fiterate b5 Especifica se as fórmulas con referencias iterativas (fórmulas que se repiten continuamente ata que o problema se resolve) se calculan tras un número específico de repeticións.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2Fsteps 30 Define o número máximo de pasos de iteración.
3a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcalculatepage%2FOptCalculatePage 10b Define a configuración de cálculo aplicábel ás follas de cálculo, o comportamento das follas de cálculo con referencias iterativas, a configuración de datas, o número de decimais, e se haberá que diferenciar entre letras maiúsculas e minúsculas ao buscar .
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fentries 35 Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents.
32 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Finsertions 3a Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document.
31 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fdeletions 39 Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document.
2f modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2Fchanges 31 Specifies the color for changes of cell contents.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptchangespage%2FOptChangesPage 5c The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
27 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FprintCB e3 Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
2a modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FsuppressCB 56 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
30 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdlg%2FoptCalcPrintPage 43 Determina a configuración da impresora para as follas de cálculo.
42 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptcompatibilitypage%2FOptCompatibilityPage 34 Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
2e modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptformula%2FOptFormula 35 Defines formula syntax options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
36 modules%2Fscalc%2Fui%2Foptdefaultpage%2FOptDefaultPage 37 Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
34 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fhandlesbezier ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fdragstripes 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fmoveoutline 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2Fruler 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fsdviewpage%2FSdViewPage 26 Specifies the available display modes.
24 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldangle 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
21 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fbigortho 16b Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldsnaparea cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnappoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
22 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapframe 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
27 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fmtrfldbezangle 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
1f svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Frotate 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
1e svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fortho 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
23 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnapborder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
26 svx%2Fui%2Foptgridpage%2Fsnaphelplines 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3d Define a configuración da grade para crear e mover obxectos.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpapertryfrmprntrcb 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbackcb 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fbrouchrb 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftilepgrb a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffittopgrb 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
32 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagedefaultrb 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
31 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fblackwhiterb 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ffrontcb 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
30 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fgrayscalerb 35 Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale.
2e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdefaultrb 34 Specifies that you want to print in original colors.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Ftimecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2f modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fhiddenpgcb 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fdatecb 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fpagenmcb 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
2d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Fprntopts%2Fprntopts 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FscaleBox 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
37 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Funits 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FstrtwithPag 4e Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide.
3b modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fdistrotcb 70 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fcopywhenmove 68 Especifica se debe crearse automaticamente unha copia ao mover un obxecto mentres preme a tecla Control.
40 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fbackgroundback 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fstartwithwizard 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 46 Especifica se debe seleccionarse un marco de texto ao premer no texto.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FmetricFields 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
3c modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fobjalwymov a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 71 Especifica se é necesario pasar inmediatamente ao modo edición de texto despois de premer nun obxecto de texto.
3e modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Ftextselected 46 Especifica se debe seleccionarse un marco de texto ao premer no texto.
3a modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2Fqickedit 71 Especifica se é necesario pasar inmediatamente ao modo edición de texto despois de premer nun obxecto de texto.
41 modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FcbCompatibility 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
3d modules%2Fsimpress%2Fui%2Foptimpressgeneralpage%2FOptSavePage 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions cb Define a configuración global para documentos de debuxo, incluíndo o contido que se debe mostrar, a escala que se debe usar, o aliñamento de grade e o contido que se vai imprimir de forma predefinida.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
d tobeannounced 49 Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fzoom 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fframe 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fnorightspaces 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
2b modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftext 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizenormal 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
2c modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Ftitle 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizezoomed 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2Fsizescaled 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
34 modules%2Fsmath%2Fui%2Fsmathsettings%2FSmathSettings 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fdefault 4d Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2Fcolors 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptchartcolorspage%2FOptChartColorsPage 36 Displays all the colors available for the data series.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fpp_saveorig 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
21 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fwo_basic d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2Fex_exec bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
24 cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrpage%2FOptFltrPage 81 Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptfltrembedpage%2Fchecklbcontainer ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasiansupport 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrentdoc 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcomplexlanguage 3e Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fasianlanguage 4b Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets.
32 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fignorelanguagechange dd Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdatepatterns cd Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fcurrencylb 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fctlsupport 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fwesternlanguage 4d Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fdecimalseparator 7f Especifica o uso da tecla separadora de decimal definida no seu sistema ao premer na correspondente tecla do teclado numérico.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Flocalesetting 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2Fuserinterface c3 Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptlanguagespage%2FOptLanguagesPage 4f Define os idiomas predefinidos e parte da configuración local para documentos.
1d cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fend 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
1f cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstart 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fstandard 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctkanacompression 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fpunctcompression 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Flanguage 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fnocompression 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharpunctkerning 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2Fcharkerning 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptasianpage%2FOptAsianPage 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignorepunctuation 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchbavahafa 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchiaiya 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchseshezeje 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchkiku 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchtsithichidhizi 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignoremiddledot 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchdiziduzu 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchcontractions 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchvariantformkanji 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatcholdkanaforms 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
30 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchrepeatcharmarks 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2f cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchminusdashchoon 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
31 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchhiraganakatakana 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
33 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchprolongedsoundmark 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2c cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fignorewhitespace 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
2e cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchfullhalfwidth 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2d cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchhyuiyubyuvyu 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
25 cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2Fmatchcase 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptjsearchpage%2FOptJSearchPage 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fnumerals d1 Selecciona o tipo de numerais utilizados no texto, nos textos incorporados a obxectos, nos campos e nos controis en todos os módulos de %PRODUCTNAME. Isto non afecta ao contido das celas de %PRODUCTNAME Calc.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementvisual 9b Premendo a frecha cara á dereita móvese o cursor do texto cara á dereita. Premendo a frecha cara á esquerda móvese o cursor do texto cara á esquerda.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fmovementlogical b8 Premendo na frecha cara á dereita móvese o cursor do texto cara ao final do texto actual. Premendo a frecha cara á esquerda móvese o cursor do texto cara ao comezo do texto actual.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Frestricted 4b Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2Fsequencechecking 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptctlpage%2FOptCTLPage 41 Define as opcións para documentos con deseño de texto complexo.
24 cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Ftimeout 50 Define o tempo en segundos que se debe esperar ata que se libera unha conexión.
2a cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fenablepooling 8d Seleccione un controlador da lista e marque a caixa de verificación Activar agrupamento para este controlador para agrupar a súa conexión.
2e cui%2Fui%2Fconnpooloptions%2Fconnectionpooling 37 Especifica se deben agruparse as conexións escollidas.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 37 Especifica se deben agruparse as conexións escollidas.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fdelete 28 Elimina da lista a entrada seleccionada.
1f cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fnew 50 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ligazón de base de datos para crear unha nova entrada.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fdbregisterpage%2Fedit 56 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ligazón de base de datos para editar a entrada seleccionada.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 81 Lista o ficheiro de base de datos e o nome rexistrado das bases de datos rexistradas. Prema dúas veces para editar unha entrada.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 5d Insira un nome para a base de datos. %PRODUCTNAME usa ese nome para acceder á base de datos.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 5b Abre unha caixa de diálogo de ficheiros onde pode seleccionar o ficheiro de base de datos.
26 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fclasspath 2a Abre a caixa de diálogo Camiño de clase.
22 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavas b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
27 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fparameters 37 Abre a caixa de diálogo Parámetros de inicio de Java.
20 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fadd 3a Engada un camiño ao cartafol raíz dun JRE no computador.
28 cui%2Fui%2Foptadvancedpage%2Fjavaenabled 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Fremove 6c Seleccione un ficheiro ou cartafol na lista e prema en Eliminar para eliminar o obxecto do camiño de clase.
21 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Ffolder 36 Seleccione un cartafol e engádao ao camiño de clase.
22 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Farchive 55 Seleccione un ficheiro de datos en formato jar ou zip e engádao ao camiño de clase.
20 cui%2Fui%2Fjavaclasspath%2Fpaths 42 Especifica a localización de clases e bibliotecas de clases Java.
2a cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fremovebtn 33 Elimina o parámetro de inicio de JRE seleccionado.
2a cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fassignbtn 35 Engade o parámetro de inicio de JRE actual á lista.
2b cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fassignlist 7b Lista os parámetros de inicio de JRE atribuídos. Para eliminar un parámetro de inicio, seleccióneo e prema en Eliminar.
2f cui%2Fui%2FJavaStartParameters%2Fparameterfield bd Introduza un parámetro de inicio para un JRE da mesma forma que o faría nunha liña de ordes. Prema en Atribuír para engadir o parámetro á lista de parámetros de inicio dispoñíbeis.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Flow db A macro pode configurarse para un comezo automático e, pode realizar accións potencialmente daniñas como eliminar ou renomear ficheiros. Non é recomendábel esta configuración ao abrir documentos de outros autores.
25 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fmed 134 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. Poden executarse as macros procedentes de fontes fiábeis. Alén diso, pódese executar calquera macro que proceda dunha localización de ficheiro fiábel. Con todas as demais macros é preciso fornecer unha confirmación.
26 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fhigh 101 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. Só as macros asinadas das fontes fiábeis teñen permiso de execución. Alén diso, todas as macros das localizacións fiábeis de ficheiros teñen permiso de execución.
27 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2Fvhigh 92 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. As macros desas localizacións teñen permiso de execución.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritylevelpage%2FSecurityLevelPage 92 As localizacións de ficheiros fiábeis poden definirse no separador Fontes fiábeis. As macros desas localizacións teñen permiso de execución.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovefile 51 Elimina o cartafol seleccionado da lista de localizacións fiábeis de ficheiros.
29 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Faddfile 7f Abre unha caixa de diálogo de selección de cartafoles. Seleccione un cartafol desde o que se poidan executar todas as macros.
2b xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Flocations 5f Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
2a xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fviewcert 49 Abre a caixa de diálogo Ver certificado para o certificado seleccionado.
2e xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fcertificates 1f Lista os certificados fiábeis.
2c xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2Fremovecert 45 Elimina o certificado seleccionado da lista de certificados fiábeis.
33 xmlsec%2Fui%2Fsecuritytrustpage%2FSecurityTrustPage 1f Lista os certificados fiábeis.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Ftest 5c Abre a caixa de diálogo Probar configuración da conta para probar a configuración actual.
2e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fport 17 Introduza o porto SMTP.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplyto 46 Insira o enderezo que desexa usar para o envio de e-mails de resposta.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserver 22 Introduza o nome do servidor SMTP.
33 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Freplytocb 85 Usa o enderezo de correo electrónico que introduciu na caixa de texto Enderezo de resposta como o enderezo ao que se debe responder.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fserverauthentication a4 Abre a caixa de diálogo Autenticación de servidor, onde vostede pode especificar a configuración de autenticación do servidor para o correo electrónico seguro.
31 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Faddress 42 Introduza o seu enderezo de correo electrónico para as respostas.
35 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fdisplayname 15 Introduza o seu nome.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2Fsecure 5a Cando está dispoñíbel, utiliza unha conexión segura para enviar correos electrónicos.
38 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fmailconfigpage%2FMailConfigPage 15 Introduza o seu nome.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fchecknow 22 A verificación efectuarase agora.
2b cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feverymonth 29 A verificación efectuarase mensualmente.
29 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryday 27 A verificación efectúase diariamente.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Fautocheck 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
2a cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2Feveryweek 48 A verificación efectuarase semanalmente. Esta é a opción predefinida.
34 cui%2Fui%2Foptonlineupdatepage%2FOptOnlineUpdatePage 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finpassword 18 Introduza o contrasinal.
42 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Finusername 31 Introduza o nome de usuario para o servidor IMAP.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fimap 38 Especifica que o servidor de entrada de correo usa IMAP.
3e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fserver 41 Introduza o nome do servidor de mensaxes de correo POP 3 ou IMAP.
44 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fsmtpafterpop 54 Seleccione se para enviar correos electrónicos é necesario ler antes os recibidos.
43 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Foutpassword 2f Introduza o contrasinal para o nome de usuario.
40 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fusername 31 Introduza o nome de usuario para o servidor SMTP.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fport 2b Introduza o porto no servidor POP3 ou IMAP.
4e modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fseperateauthentication 55 Seleccione esta opción se o servidor SMTP esixe un nome de usuario e un contrasinal.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fpop3 39 Especifica que o servidor de entrada de correo usa POP 3.
46 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2Fauthentication 4d Activa a autenticación necesaria para enviar correos electrónicos por SMTP.
54 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Fauthenticationsettingsdialog%2FAuthenticationSettingsDialog 4d Activa a autenticación necesaria para enviar correos electrónicos por SMTP.
30 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Fstop 49 Prema no botón Parar para interromper manualmente unha sesión de proba.
32 modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2Ferrors 6b Na caixa de lista Erros pode ler unha explicación dos erros encontrados durante a proba da configuración.
3c modules%2Fswriter%2Fui%2Ftestmailsettings%2FTestMailSettings 6b Na caixa de lista Erros pode ler unha explicación dos erros encontrados durante a proba da configuración.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 77 A páxina Camiño do certificado da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado exhibe a localización e o estado do certificado.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 52 Use a caixa lista de valores para visualizar os valores e copialos no portapapeis.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 6a A páxina Detalles da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información detallada sobre o certificado.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 65 A páxina Xeral da caixa de diálogo Ver certificado mostra información básica sobre o certificado.